LRU4240
Dual Trunk E1 Router
User Guide
Software revision 2.3RT
TECHNICAL:
SALES:
0118 96 56 000
0870 90 10 750
Part 098-04240-18 Rev. 12
October 2003
FAX:
0118 96 55 001
ADDRESS:
WEB:
464 Basingstoke Road, Reading, Berkshire RG2 0BG
www.blackbox.co.uk
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Copyright
Copyright © 1998, BLACK BOX Ltd
World copyright reserved. No part of this publication may be stored in a retrieval system,
transmitted, or reproduced in any way, including but not limited to photocopy, photograph,
magnetic, chemical, or other record, without the prior agreement and written permission of
BLACK BOX Ltd.
ISO Compliance
Products Manufactured Under
An ISO 9001 Certified
Quality Management System
Warning
Caution
The Dual Trunk E1 Router complies with FCC Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules concerning radio frequency emissions for Class A computing
devices. The following section is required by the FCC.
In accordance with FCC Part 15 section 15.21, changes or modifications made by the buyer that
are not expressly approved by BLACK BOX Ltd could void the buyer’s authority to operate
this equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his
own expense.
This Class A digital device meets all requirementsof the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations.
Cet Appareil numerique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le
materiel brouilleur du Canada.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
NOTE: As per the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology
Equipment (VCCI), the Dual Trunk E1 Router complies with VCCI Class 1 ITE. This
equipment is in the 1st Class category (information equipment to be used in commercial and/or
industrial areas) and conforms to the standards set by the Voluntary Control Council for
Interference by Information Technology Equipment aimed at preventing radio interference in
commercial and/or industrial areas. Consequently, when used in a residential area or in an
adjacent area thereto, radio interference may be caused to radios and TV receivers, etc. Read
the instructions for correct handling.
Regulatory Information
The equipment complies with the following applicable European Directives 73/23/EEC,
89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC and 1995/5-EC.
Customer Information
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. You will find the label located on the
bottom of the enclosure. This label contains the FCC Registration Number and Ringer
Equivalence Number (REN) for this equipment. You must, upon request, provide this
information to your telephone company.
Incidence of harm: If your telephone equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you
in advance. But if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You
will be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
Rights of the telephone company: Your telephone company may make changes in its facilities,
equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the proper functioning of your equipment.
If they do, you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted
telephone service.
Malfunction of the equipment: In the event this equipment should fail to operate properly,
disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Try using another FCC approved telephone in the
same telephone jack. If the trouble does not persist and appears to be with this unit, disconnect
the unit from the telephone line and discontinue use of the unit until it is repaired. Please note
that the telephone company may ask that you disconnect this equipment from the telephone
network until the problem has been corrected or until you’re sure that the equipment is not
malfunctioning.
iv
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
35
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E1 NTU with QoS User’s Guide
16
SALES:0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dula Trunk E1 Router
Preface
AUDIENCE
This Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide is intended for network professionals who want
instructions for installing and configuring their digital service unit router.
ORGANIZATION
E1 Router, and its placement in a Wide Area Network.
should have received in your shipping carton, and the hardware requirements for setting up
the LRU4240 in your network.
terminal, logging on to the device; explains how to navigate the terminal screens and
configure your device to work with your network.
WAN interfaces, the interface IP addresses, NMS IP addresses, Radius authentication,
DHCP, and miscellanous management settings.
VLAN Bridging applications
dynamic routing, and Network Address Translation (NAT)
access list
operation of the device and its associated cabling and equipment.
LRU4240 router. Provides instructions on the option of collecting RMON-2 data.
electrical, physical, and networking characteristics.
Appendix B, “Cables and Connector Pin Assignments,” details connector and pin
assignments.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
interface commands and parameters
CONVENTIONS
This section describes the conventions used to delineate specific types of information
throughout Black Box user guides.
Symbols
Symbols denote text that requires special attention. The information contained alongside a
symbol corresponds to one of four levels of severity:
NOTE: Follow guidelines in this, or the previous, paragraph to use the Black
Box product more effectively.
CAUTION: Follow guidelines in this, or the previous, paragraph to avoid
equipment damage or faulty application.
WARNING: Follow the instructions in this, or the previous, paragraph to
avoid personal injury.
ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE — CAUTION: Follow the instructions in this,
or the previous, paragraph to avoid the discharge of static electricity, and
subsequent damage to the equipment.
10
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Typography
This manual delineates the names of files, commands, and actions by using the fonts and
typefaces described in the following table:
Typeface or
Symbol
Purpose
Example
Courier
Font
AaBbCc123
The names of commands, files, and
directories, as well as on-screen
computer output.
Edit your.login file.
Use ls -a to list all files.
machine_name% You have
mail.
Courier
The input you provide, as contrasted with machine_name% su
Font, Bold
AaBbCc123
on-screen computer output.
Keystrokes that you must provide to use
the application.
Press Ctrl-Lto refresh the screen.
Palatino Font,
Italic
Command-line placeholder that you
replace with a real name or value.
To delete a file, type rmfilename
AaBbCc123
Book titles, new words or terms, or
words that need to be emphasized.
Refer to Chapter 6 in the User Guide.
These are called class options.
You must be logged in as root to access
this directory.
▼
Symbol that denotes a single-step
procedure or task. Procedures requiring
more than one task are numbered.
Zapf Dingbats
Font
Palatino Font,
Bold Blue,
Underscore
AaBbCc123
Hyperlinks in the table of contents.When
viewing the Portable Document Format
(PDF) version of the user guide, you can
click on one of these to jump directly to
the selected subject matter.
Palatino Font,
Blue
Hyperlinks throughout general text.
AaBbCc123
or
AaBbCc123
Helvetica Bold Denotes actual markings on front or back Attach the cable to the TERMINAL port
panels.
BLACK BOX TECHNICAL SUPPORT
If you should experience difficulty with the setup and/or operation of your Black Box
equipment, the Black Box Technical Support staff can assist you at any time.
Telephone
FAX
0118 96 56 000
0118 96 55 001
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Internet
www.blackbox.co.uk
RETURNING A UNIT
Use the following procedure if you need to return a unit for service or repair,
1. Contact the Black Box Customer Service Department at
0870 90 10 750, or fax a request to 0118 96 55 001 to obtain an ERN
(Equipment Returns Number) number.
2. Package the unit carefully and, before sealing the shipping carton, include any
information you can provide about the problems you are currently experiencing
with the unit.
3. Attach an address label to the shipping carton. Be sure to include the ERN
number:
Customer Service Department
Black Box
464 Basingstoke Road
Reading, Berkshire RG2 0BG
ERN # ___________
SEND US YOUR COMMENTS
Please let us know if this user guide meets your requirements.
Does the manual answer your questions?
Is the manual thorough?
Is the manual easy to use: can you find the information you need?
Is anything missing from the manual?
What would you like to see in the manual?
Black Box
FAX
0118 96 55 001
All suggestions and comments are appreciated.
12
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Product Overview
1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The Dual Trunk E1 Router is an intelligent network access solution providing connectivity to public
and private packet-based networks. Available as a standalone unit it integrates a dual CSU/DSU,
routing, and WAN Probe in one single platform.
Figure 1-1
Dual Trunk E1 Router
The Dual Trunk E1 Router supports bridging, static routing, and dynamic routing RIP1, RIP2, and
OSPF. The two E1 links can be configured as either two independent PPP or Frame Relay links to
different destinations, or a single multilink connection (MLPPP or MLFR FRF.16 ) to one
destination for load balancing and link redundancy application. A firewall permits or denies access
based on source and destination IP addresses.
Configuration and troubleshooting is accessible to novice and advanced users with the availability
of a menu-based Terminal User Interface and an industry-standard Command Line Interface (CLI).
Complete router configuration can be automated remotely by downloading router configuration
files.
The Dual Trunk E1 Router is SNMP-manageable, offers menu-driven configuration, includes
comprehensive diagnostics, in-band management, and network performance monitoring (RMON1
and RMON2). These tools provide visibility on the usage of the WAN connections.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
APPLICATIONS
Dual independent links application
Load balancing
When multiple paths exist to the same destination, sending all IP packets on a single route is
probably not the most efficient use of the available bandwidth. Load balancing is the practice of
distributing traffic among multiple paths to the same destination to achieve higher throughput and
avoid delays.
The Dual E1 Trunk Router IP routing engine maintains a cost metric parameter with each route
learnt dynamically or programmed statically. If more than one route of equal cost is found for a
particular destination, the routing engine will distribute the packets equally among the available
routes using a round-robin algorithm.
If multiple routes are found with unequal costs then the route with lesser cost metric is chosen.
Redundancy
With multiple paths to the same destination, the routing engine also performs redundancy at both
the physical layer and the network layer. By monitoring the status of the physical link interface and
the PPP negotiation, the unit knows when a link is physically down or a PPP connection is down.
When either events occurs, the routing engine will balance traffic to the active link.
14
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Multilink application
Multilink PPP (MLPPP) or Multilink Frame Relay (MLFR) bundles the two E1 ports to pass traffic
at twice the speed of a single E1 link. The standard MLPPP per RFC1990 facilitates interoperability
with routers from other router vendors.
A pair of Dual E1 Trunk Router can be deployed in a a back-to-back configuration offering a high-
speed 4 Mbps point-to-point LAN extension.
Redundancy
With multilink, redundancy is performed at the link layer, if a link is down the traffic is still carried
over the active link. If a failed link comes back up again it is automatically added to the bundle, and
traffic resumes at twice the speed again.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
MONITORING THE ENTIRE WAN PROTOCOL STACK
With the Dual Trunk E1 Router you can monitor the entire WAN protocol stack. Higher level
protocols can be monitored using RMON-2. PPP connections can be monitored using RMON-1, and
the physical layer can be monitored using diagnostic capabilities as outlined in RFC 1406.
Monitoring Higher Protocol Layers
The Dual Trunk E1 Router includes RMON-2 capabilities. This lets you identify the Top Talkers
(256 greatest bandwidth users), and drill down to the Top Applications to see which applications are
using the most bandwidth. It also lets you track and report traffic sent between pairs of network
addresses and categorizes them by applications and protocols.
Table 1-2 lists the RMON tables supported in RMON-2.
Table 1-1 RMON-2 Tables
RMON-2
Protocol Directory
Network Layer Host
Protocol Distribution
Application Layer Host
Network layer matrix group
Application layer matrix group
Using the optional ChoiceView Plus software application, you can display the statistics gathered by
RMON-2.
Table 1-2 RMON Tables
RMON-1
RMON-2
(Provided with Level 2 & 3) (Option for Level 2 & 3)
History
Events
Protocol Directory
Network Layer Host
Protocol Distribution
Application Layer Host
Statistics
Alarms
To take advantage of the Dual Trunk E1 Router’s RMON-2 capabilities, Black Box has created an
application, ChoiceView Plus, that allows you to display RMON-2 data in real-time, graphical, and
tabular formats.
16
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Installation
2
UNPACKING AND CHECKING EQUIPMENT
Before you begin the installation, you need to:
•
•
Unpack and inspect the LRU4240 for damage that may have occurred during shipment
Save all enclosed packing slips, documents, shipping cartons, and packing materials until you
have completed the installation and verified the unit’s operation
Package Contents
Make sure that you have received all the items ordered.
•
•
LRU4240 Dual Trunk E1 Router
A User Guide
BEFORE YOU INSTALL
Dual Trunk E1 Router operation requires the proper data port, com port and network cables. If you
don’t have the correct cables, they may be ordered by calling Black Box at (0118) 965-5100 and
asking for Inside Sales, or you may order from the Black Box Online Store on our web site:
www.blackbox.co.uk.
SITE REQUIREMENTS
Install the LRU4240 in accordance with the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, Articles 110-
16, 110-17, and 110-18. This code defines an access area such as a dedicated equipment room or
closet that is clean, well-ventilated, and free of environmental extremes. Allow .5 - 1.0 m (2-3 feet)
of clearance around the unit for access during installation.
Table 2-1 Site Environmental Requirements
Item
Specification
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Maximum Altitude
0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F) ambient
-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
0% to 95% noncondensing
4.6 km (15,000 ft)
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Do no
Voltages as high as 200 VDC may exist at the telephone company’s E1 interface in
the form of simplex power. These voltages are hazardous and can cause death or
severe injury! Do not proceed with this installation if any voltage is present between
the send and receive pairs of the network interface. You can ask the serving telephone
company to temporarily disconnect the simplex power during installation.
INSTALLATION
The following procedures outline the steps necessary to install the Dual Trunk E1 Router, power the
device, and attach it to a terminal.
Installing the Dual Trunk E1 Router
The Dual Trunk E1 Router should be installed on a flat, stable surface or mounted on a tray.
To install the Dual Trunk E1 Router on a flat surface:
1. Remove the covering from the four stick-on rubber pads and attach them to the bottom
of the unit.
2. Place the unit on a flat, stable surface.
You may stack other units on top of the Dual Trunk E1 Router.
Installation Using AC Power
Insert the power cable into the power receptacle on the Dual Trunk E1 Router rear panel. Connect
the other end to the AC outlet.
The LEDs on the front panel flash and status messages appear on the alphanumeric display as the
Dual Trunk E1 Router runs the Self Test at power up.
NOTE: DC Power may be used as a primary power source or as a backup
power source, should AC power fail.
18
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Reserved
(DTE 2)
Network BNC
AUX BNC
Ground Stud
Network Port
(AUX)
COMM Port Network Port
Ethernet Port
DC Power Connector
Reserved
(DTE 1)
AC Power Connector
Figure 2-1
Back Panel View–Ports and Ground Stud
Installation Using DC Power
You need a tray cable that is UL recognized 14 AWG, 3 conductors, copper strand wire, electrical
power and control cable, type TC: tray cable, 600 V 90°C. Alpha Wire Company No. 45443 is an
example.
To connect the Dual Trunk E1 Router to DC power:
1. Place the unit on a flat surface or tray.
2. Make sure the DC power source is off.
3. Before you connect the unit to the centralized DC power source, strip 2 inches of jacket
material off the tray cable and 1/2 inch of insulation off each wire.
4. Connect the -48 V wire to the positive (+) terminal using a small flat screwdriver to
fasten the wire.
5. Connect the ground wire to the negative (-) terminal using the same method.
The unit is designed to operate with negative voltage; therefore, the positive terminal is
connected to ground.
6. Connect a properly grounded third wire to the ground stud near the terminal block
using a 1/4 inch wrench and fastening torque of 5 inch-pounds.
7. To minimize disturbance to the wires through casual contact, secure the tray cable near
the rack frame using multiple cable ties.
Use at least four cable ties, a minimum of 4 inches apart. The first tie should be within 6
inches of the terminal block.
8. Connect the Dual Trunk E1 Router to a DC power source. Turn on power source.
The LEDs on the front panel flash and status messages appear on the alphanumeric display as the
Dual Trunk E1 Router runs the Self Test at power up.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
20
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Terminal Setup
3
The Dual Trunk E1 Router can be operated using basic front panel controls, or through a more in-
depth terminal interface. It is divided into two main sections listed below:
•
•
Navigating the Front Panel
Terminal Mode
NAVIGATING THE FRONT PANEL
From the front panel, you can:
•
•
•
View and change configuration parameters
Run diagnostic tests
Monitor the Dual Trunk E1 Router status
The front panel allows access to most of the configuration and monitoring features of the Dual
Trunk E1 Router. You may find that for regular daily use, the front panel provides a quick and easy
means of monitoring the status of your device and changing configuration parameters.
The front panel is controlled using the front panel buttons: EXIT, UP arrow, DOWN arrow, and
Table 3-1 Button Usage
Button
Function
Back/Exit Button
Up/Back Button
Down/Forward Button
Enter Button
Cancel an option or exit a menu
Move backward through the options
Move forward through the options
Select an option
The front panel and its buttons and LEDs are shown on page page 24. If you wish to disable these
buttons, enable Protect Mode on Menu-4, Main Configuration using the terminal user interface. You
will still be able to view the unit’s settings using the buttons, but you will not be able to change the
settings.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
3
1
2
4
5
6
7
8 9 j k l
m
Figure 3-1
Dual Trunk E1 Router Indications and Buttons
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
#
8
9
j
Description
Loopback LEDs
Reserved
Alphanumeric Display
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Back/Exit Button
Up/Back Button
Down/Forward Button
Enter Button
k
l
Reserved
Reserved
m
Reserved
The LEDs for the Ethernet port are located in the back of the unit.
22
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Front Panel Display
The front panel alphanumeric display provides a 2-line, 16-character message. It provides access to
the Dual Trunk E1 Router via the front panel buttons. Press the UP ARROW and the DOWN
ARROW keys to move among the various menus. Using the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW
keys will move you among the categories listed in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2 Front Panel Categories
Field
Function
EFS <XXX>%
CONFIGURATION
The percentage of time the E1 link has run without error.
Access the Dual Trunk E1 Router’s basic configuration options, the unit’s serial number,
and the current software version.
TEST
Run various diagnostics tests.
MONITOR
Track errors and system status parameters.
Default Display
EFS <XXX>%
ALL LINKS
NORMAL
The EFS Field
To reach the EFS (Error Free Seconds) statistic, press the EXIT Button repeatedly until the EFS
category appears on the display. The EFS field presents the percentage of seconds in which no error
occurred. The higher the percentage, the more stable the E1 connection.
Error-free seconds are calculated using the following formula:
GoodSeconds
EFS = ------------------------------------
TotalSeconds
GoodSeconds = AllSeconds – (BadSeconds + UnavailableSeconds)
The Configuration Options
To reach the Configurationoptions:
1. Starting from the default display, press the UP or DOWN Arrow button to move among
the fields until the CONFIGURATIONcategory appears on the display.
2. Press the ENTER button to enter Configuration mode.
UNIT CONFIG appears on the display.
3. Press either the UP Arrow or the DOWN Arrow to move through the configuration
option, press the ENTER button.
The display changes to reflect the first in the list of editable fields.
4. Press the UP Arrow or the DOWN Arrow to move through the options in the
CONFIGURATIONmenu until the feature you want to change is displayed.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
5. Press the ENTER button to enter edit mode for the selected feature.
6. Use the UP Arrow and/or DOWN Arrow to change the field.
7. Press the ENTER button to enter your change.
8. Press the EXIT button to leave edit mode.
Dual Trunk E1 Router Configuration Option
The following table lists the configuration options.
Table 3-3 Dual Trunk E1 Router Configuration Options
Option
Definition
UNIT CONFIG
Allows you to change the UNIT ID, the Date and Time, and the COMM Port
Configuration. The options allow you to change:
• Unit ID
• Date and Time
• COMM Port Configuration
• Baud Rate
• Parity Bits
• Word Length
• Stop Bits
• Xoff/Xon
• Test Length
In addition, the UNIT CONFIG option displays the hardware revision, the
software revision, and the serial number.
IP CONFIG
Allows you to view of configure your device for use within an IP network.
• View the IP address of the COMM port (COMM IP ADD).
• View the IP address of the NET port ( NET IP ADDRESS).
• Configure the IP address for the Ethernet port ( ETHERNET IP AD.
• Configure the IP mask (ETH IP MASK)
The Test Options
Tests can be run on the WAN ports. To conduct a test from the front panel:
1. Press the UP Arrow button to move among the fields until the Testfield appears on the
display.
2. Press the ENTER button to enter test mode.
SELF TESTappears on the display.
3. Press either the UP Arrow or the DOWN Arrow to move through the test options until
the desired test is displayed. The following tests are available:
•
•
SELF TEST
LOOP NET
24
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
•
•
•
•
•
LOOP PAYLOAD
LOOPUP REMOTE
TEST PATTERN
LOOPDOWN REMOTE
LAMP TEST
4. Press ENTER To select the test. Press ENTER again to run the test.
Follow the display prompts to complete the test.
To Stop a Test
If you want to stop a running test, simultaneously press both the DOWN ARROW key and the UP
ARROW key on your front panel.
The Monitor Options
The Monitorcategory provides a means of quickly monitoring the status of your network from the
alphanumeric display. While many of the Monitoroptions are read only, counters can be cleared
and reset to zero.
To reach the Monitoroptions:
1. Press the UP Arrow button to move among the categories until the Monitorcategory
appears on the display.
2. Press the ENTER button to enter Monitor mode.
UNIT STATUS appears on the display.
3. Press either the UP or DOWN Arrow to move through the monitoring options. The
Table 3-4 Monitor Options
Monitor Option
UNIT STATUS
NET STATUS
Write Access
Provides timing status. Read only.
Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF),
NORMAL. Read only.
PPP STATUS
Provide status of the PPP link.
MLPPP STATUS
ETHERNET STATUS
Provide status of the Multilink PPP link.
Provide status of the Ethernet interface.
TERMINAL USER INTERFACE MODE
The front panel display provides miminal setup, configuration and verification menus. To fully
configure your LRU4240 router you will need to access the Terminal User Interface (TUI) directly
through the COMM port, or Telnet via the Ethernet port or the WAN ports.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Terminal Interface Navigation
The terminal interface contains a number of menus which are used to configure, monitor, and
manage the Dual Trunk E1 Router.
•
•
•
To navigate the fields in the menus, use the arrow keys on your keypad.
To select a menu, press the menu number as indicated at the bottom of the menu screen.
To change a parameter, use the arrow keys to cycle through the available options and press
Returnto select the highlighted option.
Setting a Menu Parameter
Use the following procedure to select a parameter, set it, and confirm your action:
NOTE: You can also use the u(up), d (down), r(right), and l (left)
keys in place of the arrow keys.
1. Move the cursor to a field using the arrow keys, and press Return to activate edit
mode.
To change a parameter, use the arrow keys to cycle through the available options and press
Returnto select the highlighted option. In other fields, you will be prompted for the required
value. Enter the value, and press Return.
•
•
•
Attaching the Dual Trunk E1 Router to your terminal
Using Hyperterm to log on to the Dual Trunk E1 Router
Configuring access rights
ATTACHING TO A TERMINAL
The Dual Trunk E1 Router can be attached via the COMM Port to the serial port of a server,
computer, or terminal. You may need to attach your Dual Trunk E1 Router using the COMM Port
on the rear of the device.
▼ Connect an RJ-45 to DE-9 COMM Port cable from the COMM Port on the Dual
Trunk E1 Router to the COMM Port on your terminal.
To communicate from an ASCII terminal to your device, use the COMM Port connector on
the back panel of your Dual Trunk E1 Router (Figure 3-2).
COMM Port
Figure 3-2
COMM Port on Dual Trunk E1 Router
26
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Using the Ethernet port as management interface
As an alternative to managing the Dual Trunk E1 Router via the COMM port, you can manage it
directly using the Ethernet port (ENET). You can then Telnet into the device from any workstation
in the network. This provides for both local and remote access.
Using Terminal Software
Once you have attached the Dual Trunk E1 Router to a terminal using one of the methods described
above, you will need to use terminal emulation software to communicate with, and configure the
device. You may use Hyperterm Windows, or the terminal emulation software of your choice. If
using Hyperterm, follow the instructions outlined below to set up and run the program.
Terminal Setup
The COMM Port factory default settings on your device are defined as:
•
•
•
•
Baud Rate — 38400
Parity Bit — none
Word Length — 8
Stop Bits — 2
Make sure that your terminal software is set to work with these parameters, or use the front panel to
alter the default settings. Once you are logged in, the unit’s COMM port settings may be changed as
parameters should be set:
•
•
Hardware Flow Control––none
Terminal Emulation––VT-100
Hyperterm Windows Setup
Hypterterm is a Windows terminal emulation program that can be used to log on to the unit.
1. Run Hypertrm.exe.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
2. Type a File Name, choose an icon then click OK.
The name allows you to save the settings for future sessions and the icon represent the
connection. You can put the icon on your desktop for easy access.
The Connect To properties tab appears (Windows 98) or the Phone Number window appears
(Windows 95)
3. From the Connect Usingfield drop-down list, select
Direct to COM1(or preferred COM port) then click OK. COM1 will be used for the
rest of this procedure.
The COM1 Properties box appears for PortSettings.
28
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
4. Configure the settings for the COM1 Properties dialog box as shown below:
•
•
•
•
•
Data bits per second –– 38,400
Data bits –– 8
Parity –– None
Stop bits –– 2
Flow control –– None
After configuring the settings, click OK
A blank screen with the cursor blinking appears.
5. Go to the File pull-down and select Properties. At the properties Dialog box, Click the
Settingstab.
6. Set the following:
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
a. Emulation field to at VT-100
b. Backscroll buffer lines to 500.
Press Ok. You can now log on to the Dual Trunk E1 Router.
Logging On from a Terminal
To log on to the unit, you must first obtain the unit ID of the device. The unit ID is printed on a
small sticker on the back or bottom of the device. You can also retrieve the unit ID via the UNIT
CONFIG option of the front panel. For information on using the front panel, see “Navigating The
New units have no password assigned. If you are logging in for the first time, you will not need to
enter a password. Press return at the prompt and Menu 1, Main Status will appear. Systems with
blank IDs are always logged on and cannot be logged off until a unit ID is assigned. For
information on assigning an ID, refer to “Setting ID, Date, Time, and Network Timing” on page 34.
The default ID is always a 6-character alphanumeric string that identifies the unit.
If you wish to display or verify the unit ID, press Ctrl-xfive times to display all devices
connected to the terminal.
To log on to the Dual Trunk E1 Router:
1. Press Ctrl-x, type the unit ID, and press Return.
If password is enabled, the system prompts for a password.
Now you need a password to log on:
2. Type the Superuser or normal user password and press Return
(For more information on normal and Superuser rights, see “Configuring Access Rights” on
page 32).
Menu-1, Main Status, appears.
If this menu does not appear, you may have an incorrect ID, a faulty connection on the
COMM Port, or an incorrect COMM Port configuration.
Table 3-5 Login Prompts
System Messages
Action
Condition
The Terminal User Interface is
already in use
Please enter the Superuser
password to force the other
user to log off or press Ctrl-
xand try again later.
Normal user logged on via Telnet.
Superuser is already logged into
the Terminal User Interface. Try
again later.
Press Ctrl-xand try again
later.
Superuser logged on.
30
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
NOTE: When accessing the unit via Telnet, the system forces you off after
the fifth unsuccessful attempt to log on.
Logging Off from a Terminal
To log off, press Ctrl-x.
The terminal stops responding to your keystrokes when you are logged off.
Adjusting COMM Port Settings
COMM port settings can be modified in the Dual Trunk E1 Router using Menu 8F - COMM Port
Configuration.
NOTE: It is possible to disrupt your terminal connection by changing these
settings.
The configurable settings are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Baud Rate
Parity
Word Length
Stop bits
Flow control
DCD
For more information on Menu 8F and available options, see the 4200 WAN Access Platform TUI
Reference Guide.
LOGGING ON FROM A TELNET CONNECTION
To log on from a Telnet connection, use a terminal or terminal emulation program to access the unit
directly.
To log on to the unit user interface using a Telnet connection:
1. Enter the Telnet COMMand and the Dual Trunk E1 Router IP address.
Example of system response: MULTI is unit ID
Current ID is MULTI
MULTI password:
If you do not have an ID, you may still log in. A “Sorry” or Logged Out” Message will
appear. Press Ctrl-x to bring up a menu. Ctrl-x will not log you out until an ID is
assigned.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
2. Enter the Normal User or Super User password.
If you do not have a password, you may still connect. When connected, Menu 1 will appear.
NOTE: If your Dual Trunk E1 Router is set for dial-up mode, that is, using a
modem and directly dialing through a standard telephone connection, it is
recommended that you DO NOT use a Telnet session to access the unit.
CONFIGURING ACCESS RIGHTS
You can create two access levels to the Dual Trunk E1 Router terminal interface—Superuser access
rights and normal user access rights—by entering unique Superuser and normal user passwords in
Menu 8C - Miscellaneous Management Configuration.
Assigning User Passwords
Since two access methods are available (using a terminal connected to the COMM Port or a Telnet
connection from a remote terminal), you should exercise caution when assigning passwords.
A “no passwords” situation gives any user logging on Superuser access rights. If this user sets only
one password, both passwords become the same.
When both passwords are the same, any user logging on with either password gains Superuser
rights. As Superuser, the individual has exclusive control of the terminal interface.
NOTE: You must set both passwords to prevent the above situations. Specify
unique Superuser and Normal User passwords in Menu-8C.
32
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Access Configuration
4
OVERVIEW OF ACCESS CONFIGURATION
This chapter contains information about configuring the LAN and WAN interfaces, the interface IP
addresses, NMS IP addresses, Radius authentication, DHCP, and miscellanous management settings
Table 4-1 Access configuration procedures
Procedure
Description
Menu
Reference
Configuring LAN
interface
To set or modify the Ethernet data port IP address and subnet mask,
and the ethernet speed (10MB/Half or 10MB/Full).
Menu-0A
Menu-0C
Setting Unit ID, Date,
Time, and E1 Network
To configure the network E1 timing, framing, and coding.
Menu-4A
Menu-4B
Allocating Timeslot for
data and voice
To allocate and map fractional dual E1 bandwidth to the Ethernet data Menu-6Z
port
Configuring WAN
protocol
To configure the WAN protocol to:
• Single link PPP interface
Menu-0A
• Dual independent PPP link interfaces
• Multilink PPP (MLPPP) interface
• Single link Frame Relay interface
• Dual links Frame Relay interfaces
• Multilink Frame Relay (MFR) interface
Configuring Frame Relay To configure statically the DLCI numbers with associated interface.
DLCIs
Menu-0E
Menu-0F
Menu-$IA
Menu-0A
Menu-8C
Menu-8G
Configuring Link
Management Information
To enable or disable LMI, and configure LMI settings, unit location
UNIT-U or UNI-N
Mapping DLCIs to IP
addresses
To configure the mapping of DLCI to the next hop IP addresses
statically and manually.
Configuring SLIP
To configure SLIP (Serial Line Interface Protocol) to allow telnet
access through the COMM port.
Configuring Access
Rights
To set the TUI normal and superuser access levels.
Configuring Radius
Authentication
To configure Radius authentication, user login and password,
preventing unauthorized access and changes to the access router TUI.
Enabling/Disabling Traffic To enable or disable the router from collecting and reporting RMON-1, Menu-0A
Monitoring (Optional)
and RMON-2 statistics.
To enable or disable Frame Relay SLA and configure Frame Relay
SLA statistics.
Menu-0H
By default Traffic monitoring is disabled.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 4-1 Access configuration procedures
Procedure
Description
Menu
Reference
Configuring SNMP
To configure SNMP “get”, “set, and” trap community” strings to
prevent unauthorized SNMP management stations from gaining access
to the router.
Menu-0B
Configure up to three Network Management Station (NMS) IP
addresses that will receive SNMP trap to report alarms.
Configuring Time and
Date synchronization
To configure RFC868 compliant time and date synchronization client. Menu-4T
Configuring DHCP relay
agent
To configure DHCP server IP address and enable DHCP relay agent.
Menu-$K
34
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
CONFIGURING LAN INTERFACE
Table 4-2 Configuring LAN interface
Procedure
Steps
Setting Ethernet port speed
To configure the ethernet speed to 10MB/Half or 10MB/Full.
1.Select Menu-0C
2.Select Data/Speed Mode
3.Select 10MB/Half or 10MB/Full setting. The default value is
10MB/Half.
Modifying Ethernet port IP address
1.Select Menu-0A
2.Select ENET IP Address/Len field
3.Enter the assigned Ethernet port IP Address and the subnet mask
SETTING ID, DATE, TIME, AND NETWORK TIMING
Unit Configuration− Menu 4A
Figure 4-1 shows Menu 4A Unit Configuration. The numbers in circles correspond to the
procedures for setting the parameters in each field.
2
1
3
Figure 4-1Menu 4A, Unit Configuration
Table 4-3 Menu-4A- Unit Configuration
Parameter
UNIT ID
Description
Field Local 1 (Alphanumeric field identifier at the top of the menu)
The Dual Trunk E1 Router comes factory configured with a unique unit ID. Each
Dual Trunk E1 router in your network must have a unique Unit ID. You may use the
preconfigured Unit ID or change it to a combination of 6 alpha and numeric
characters, but the first character must be an alpha character.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Parameter
DATE
Description
Dateor time 2
To change date or time field, select the date or time field at the top of the screen by
moving the cursor. Enter date and time as indicated by the prompt at the bottom of
the screen.
Example: 2/22/97yields 02/22/97and 22:4:6yields 22:04:06(The clock
is a 24-hour clock.)
UNIT
Protect Mode - Enabled or Disabled (default);
Enabled - Protect mode prevents you from running tests from the front panel.
NETWORK
TIMING
Main/Alt Sync - INT, NET1, NET2
Select the timing source for Main and for Alt Sync. The options INT, NET1, or
NET2 for Main and Alt Sync.
NET1 or NET2: Select this option if the network is the clock source.
INT: Select this option if timing is derived from the internal oscillator in the unit.
36
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Net Configuration and Status
Table 4-4 Menu-4B- Net configuration and status
Parameter
Status
Description
Displays the network status.
Framing
Selects the network framing format from the following options:
CRC4 enabled (the default), CRC4 disabled, and unstructured
CONFIGURING TIMESLOT ALLOCATIONS
Timeslot allocation menu is available for single and independent links applications, it is not
available with multilink. The timeslot allocation menu-6Z lets you allocate fractional E1 bandwidth
and map it to the Ethernet data port. With dual independent links the same selected timeslots will
apply to both E1 links.
Table 4-5 Menu-6Z, Timeslot configuration
Parameter
Description
Allocation type
Select the desired timeslot allocation method as Contiguous, Alternate, or
Manual.
Contiguous: To select a range of contiguous timeslots. Contiguous timeslots
are always adjacent to each other and in numerical order. To configure
contiguous timeslots, specify a valid range of timeslots. such as 17 to 25.
Manual: Move to a timeslot one at a time, and assign a Data Port to it. This method
allows any arbitrary timeslot allocation.
Allocation type
Allocate by port
Select
Allocate the selected timeslots for data, or set them to idle. Press the space bar then enter
(IDLE, FRAC01 or to select: IDLE or FRAC01.
AUX)
IDLE - Selected timeslotes will be disabled.
FRAC01 - Ethernet port
Allocate by port
TS01: Type in the starting timeslot
starting and ending TS31: Type in the ending timeslot.
timeslots
If you configure timeslots in such a way that contradicts the definition of contiguous, the Dual Trunk E1
Router will automatically set the contradicting timeslots to Idle
Table 4-6 Timeslot allocation procedures
Steps
Procedure
Allocating contiguous timeslots to
data services
1.Set allocation type to Contiguous
2.Select FRAC01 port for Ethernet port in Allocate by Port
3.Enter starting timeslot provided by your carrier
4.Enter ending timeslot provided by your carrier
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 4-6 Timeslot allocation procedures
Procedure
Steps
Disabling timeslots
Example: setting timelost 1 through 8 to Idle
1.Set allocation type to Contiguous
2.Select Idle in Allocate by Port
3.Enter starting Idle timeslot
4.Enter ending Idle timeslot
Allocating alternate timeslots
Example: timeslot 7 through 17 for data
1.Set allocation type to Alternate
2.Select FRAC01 in Allocate by Port
3.Enter 7 in starting timeslot
4.Enter 17 for end timelot
FRAC01 TS07 TS17 384 Kb/S appears in the Allocate by port fiel and
timeslots 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, and 17 are allocated to Ethernet port, while all
other timeslots are set automatically to idle.
Allocating timeslots manually
To manually allocate timeslots, move to the timeslot and specify the port.
You must the other timeslots to Idle.
Example: setting timeslots 3,7,9,14, and 15 to Ethernet port.
1.Set allocation type to Manual
2.Select timeslot 1 and set it to Idle
3.Repeat step 2 to configure the other timeslots to Idle
CONFIGURING WAN PROTOCOL
The WAN protocol can be configured to Frame Relay, Multilink Frame Relay, PPP, or MLPPP.
Configuring Single Link PPP Interface
Table 4-7 Single PPP Link Configuration
Procedure
Steps
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to PPP.
Set router traffic type to PPP
2.Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to No.
This disable multilink operation
Set WAN port 1 IP address
1.Set Menu-0A NET IP address and subnet mask
Notice the menus will be configured for PPP operations. The bottom menu will display “6-PPP
Cfg”.
38
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Configuring independent PPP links Interfaces
The PPP connection over the first T1/E1 port is assigned the interface port NET1. The second
T1/E1 port is assigned the interface port NET2.
Procedure
Purpose
Set router traffic type to PPP
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to PPP.
2.Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to No.
Set WAN port 1 IP address
1.Set Menu-0A NET1 IP address and subnet mask
Assign an IP address and subnet mask to the second T1/E1 link. This will
be identified as NET1 link in all the menus.
Set WAN port 2 IP address
1.Set Menu-0A NET2 IP address and subnet mask
Assign an IP address and subnet mask to the second T1/E1 link. This will
be identified as NET2 link in all the menus
Configuring MLPPP Interface
Procedure
Purpose
Set router traffic type to MLPPP
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to PPP.
2.Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to Yes
The menus will be configured for MLPPP operations. The bottom menu
will display “MLPPP Cfg”
Set WAN bundle connection IP
Address
1.Set Menu-0A NET IP address and subnet mask
Assign IP address and subnet mask to the bundle link associated to the
bundled T1/E1 links. The bundle link is identified as Bundle0 link in all the
menus.
Configuring PPP Protocol Parameters
Menu 6-A lets you configure the PPP or MLPPP protocol parameters:
Table 4-8 Menu-6A PPP Configuration
Parameter
Description
Keep alive timer
Controls the messages of the keepalive (echo request) messages after the link(s)
is(are) negotiated
Keep alive timeout
Retry Counter
Controls how long an end point should wait for “ech response” after ending “echo
request”
How many unsuccessful “echo requests” should be attempted before a link is
declared down
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Configuring single link Frame Relay
Table 4-9 Configuring Single link Frame Relay
Procedure
Set router traffic type to Frame
Relay
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to Frame Relay.
Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to No
Set WAN port 1 IP address
1.Set Menu-0A NET1 IP address and subnet mask
Configuring independent Frame Relay links
Table 4-10 Configuring independent Frame Relay links
Procedure
Description
Set router traffic type to Frame
Relay
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to Frame Relay.
2.Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to No
Set WAN port 1 IP address
Set WAN port 2 IP address
1.Set Menu-0A NET1 IP address and subnet mask
1.Set Menu-0A NET2 IP address and subnet mask
Configuring Multilink Frame Relay
Table 4-11 Configuring Multilink Frame Relay
Procedure
Description
Set router traffic type to Frame
Relay
1.Set Menu-0A- Traffic type field to Frame Relay.
2.Set Menu-0A Multilink Protocol field to Yes
The menus will be configured for MLFR operations. The bottom menu will
display “MLFR Cfg”
Set WAN bundle connection IP
Address
1.Set Menu-0A NET1 IP address and subnet mask
Assign IP address and subnet mask to the bundle link associated to the
bundled T1/E1 links. The bundle link is identified as Bundle0 link in all the
menus.
Configuring Frame Relay DLCIs
Dynamic configuration (LMI)
With Link Management Interface (LMI) enabled on menu-0F, the Dual Trunk E1 Router will
automatically discover the configured DLCIs on each of the WAN links.
LMI protocol allows the router to learn the DLCIs from the frame relay switch network. The router
will originate and terminate LMI requests and responses.
The Dual Trunk E1 Router support the following three widely used versions of LMI protocol:
•
•
•
ANSI T1.617 Annex D, referred as Annex D
ITU Q.933 Annex A, referred as Annex A
LMI Rev 1.0, referred as Revision 1.0
40
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
LMI message types consist of:
•
STATUS INQUIRY
STATUS INQUIRY messages are used to request information on PVCs and their associated
DLCIs. These Inquiries can be used to ask the receiving LMI-enabled device about all of the
PVCs it knows about. Annex D also supports inquiries about individual DLCIs.
•
STATUS
STATUS messages are the replies to Status Inquiries.
The Dual Trunk E1 Router supports both UNI-U and UNI-N
Manual DLCI configuration
You can enter the DLCIs manually in Menu-0E “Performance monitoring cofniguration”. Each
DLCI is a sub-interface of a network port (NET1, NET2, or NET). For each DLCI you would enter
the Committed Information Rate (CIR), and the remote far end network attached to the DLCI. The
delay threshold parameter in the table is relevant only if RMON-1 performance monitoring is
enabled.
Mapping DLCIs to IP Addresses
To send IP traffic on a DLCI interface requires address resolution to the next hop IP address. The
mapping of of link layer addresses (DLCIs) to the next hop IP address can be done manually (static
configuration) or automatically (dynamic configuration) using inverse ARP protocol (RFC2390).
When a DLCI is discovered, the router sends an inverse ARP request to the remote router or edge
router. The ARP response messages will trigger the updating of the DLCI to IP Map table.
When a PVC is deleted the table entries associated to the deleted DLCI will are automatically
removed. Entries learned through inverse ARP can be deleted manually from the table.
Manual mapping of DLCIs to IP addresses can also be entered in the DLCI to IP Address table from
Menu-$IA Frame Relay DLCI IP Map Table.
NOTE: Physical layer loss of signal does not immediately trigger deletion of the dynamically learnt mappings. After loss
of signal and failure of LMI retries, LMI status goes down and DLCIs get deleted. At this point mappings are also deleted
(made inactive).
CONFIGURING SLIP
SLIP (Serial Line Interface Protocol) is a TCP/IP protocol that allows IP packets to be transmitted
over the COMM port. This is configured using Menu 0A - Interface Configuration.
Table 4-12 Configuring COMM port IP address
Procedure
Steps
1.Set Menu-0A COMM IP address and subnet mask
Set COMM Port IP address
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
CONFIGURING TUI ACCESS RIGHTS
Table 4-13 Setting TUI access rights
Procedure
Steps
1.Select menu-8C
Setting normal user password
2.Select Normal user password field
3.Enter password, 10 characters maximum.
A “no passwords” situation gives any user logging on Superuser access
rights.
By default the normal user password is the same for super user, if no
password is set for super user.
Setting super user password
1.Select menu-8C
2.Select Super user password field
3.Enter password, 10 characters maximum
If you do set a normal user password, you should set a unique super user
password to prevent conflicts.
CONFIGURING RADIUS AUTHENTICATION
When a user telnets to the device, the Dual Trunk E1 Router prompts for user login and password,
and sends the request to a designated primary radius server to authenticate the user access. If the
server rejects access based on invalid user login or password, or if there is no response received
from the server, the Dual Trunk E1 Router will send a ... message to the user and terminates the
telnet session. Login failures are logged in the event log.
If the primary server does not respond, after a configured number of retries, the unit can send the
request to a designated secondary radius server.
A super user can always bump any existing logged user.
Table 4-14 Configuring Radius authentication
Steps
Procedure
Setting Primary Radius server IP
address
1.Select Menu-8G
2.Select Radius Primary Server IP address
3.Enter Radius Primary Server IP address
Setting Secondary Radius server IP
address (Optional)
1.Select Radius Backup Server IP address
2.Enter Radius Backup Server IP address
Enter authentication key with
Radius Primary server
1. Select Radius Primary Server Secret Key
2.Enter authentication key
Enter authentication key with
Radius Backup server
1. Select Radius Backup Server Secret Key
2.Enter authentication key
42
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 4-14 Configuring Radius authentication
Procedure
Steps
Configure authentication retries
1. Select Authentication Retries
2.Enter retry count from 1 to 3
If the primary server does not respond, after the configured number of
retries, the router will send the request to the secondary Radius server.
Configure authentication response
timeout
1. Select Authentication Response Timeout
2.Enter count from 1 to 3
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENABLING/DISABLING TRAFFIC MONITORING
Table 4-15 Enabing/ Disabling Traffic Monitoring
Procedure
Description
Disabling Traffic monitoring
1.Select Menu-0A
2.Set Traffic Monitoring field to Disabled
By default Traffic monitoring is Disabled.
Enabling Traffic Monitoring
1.Select Menu-0A
2.Set Traffic Monitoring field to Enabled
CONFIGURING SNMP.
Table 4-16 Configuring Menu-0B SNMP
Procedure
Steps
Setting get community string
1.Select Community get field
1.Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters). The
default setting is public
The router SNMP agent uses this text string to check GET requests for the
SNMP configuration from the SNMP management station.
Setting set community string
1.Select Community set field
1.Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters). The
default setting is public.
The router SNMP agent uses this text string to check SET requests from
the SNMP management station to set the SNMP configuration.
Setting trap community string
Setting First NMS IP addresses
1.Select Community trap field
2.Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters). The default
setting is public.
The router SNMP agent inserts this string in SNMP traps it sends to the
SNMP management stations.
1.Select 1st NMS IP Address field
2.Enter IP address. The router will send trap messages to this server.
3.Select 1st Output Port field
4.Selects the port (COMM, NET, or Ethernet) over which the router will
send trap to the 1st NMS IP address. Default port is COMM.
Setting second NMS IP addresses
1.Select 2nd NMS IP Address field
2.Enter IP address. The router will send trap messages to this server.
3.Select 2nd Output Port field
4.Selects the port (COMM, NET, or Ethernet) over which the router will
send trap to the 1st NMS IP address.Default port is COMM.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 4-16 Configuring Menu-0B SNMP
Procedure
Steps
Setting Third NMS IP addresses
1.Select 3rd NMS IP Address field
1.Enter IP address. The router will send trap messages to this
server.
2.Select 3rd Output Port field
3.Selects the port (COMM, NET, or Ethernet) over which the router will
send trap to the 1st NMS IP address. Default port is COMM..
CONFIGURING TIME AND DATE SYNCHRONIZATION
Table 4-17 Configuring Time and Date Synchronization
Procedure
Steps
1.Select Menu-
Setting Time server synchronization
2.Set Days, Hours, and Minutes frequency
Configuring Primary Time Server IP
Addresse
1.Select Time Src Primary IP Address field
2.Enter Time Server Primary IP address
3.Select physical port of which Time Server is connected to. ENET, ot
NET.
Configuring Secondary Time Server
IP Addresse
1.Select Time Src Secondary IP Address field
2.Enter Time Server Primary IP address
The router accesses both the primary and secondary time servers from the
same port.
Enable Time Synchonization
1.Select Automatic Sync field and set it to Enabled.
The router Time Client will start synchronizing time and date with the
designated Time Server.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
CONFIGURING DHCP
Table 4-18 Configuring DHCP
Procedure
Steps
Setting DHCP Server IP address
1.Select Menu-$K
2.Select DHCP server field
3.Enter DHCP Server IP address.
Enabling DHCP Relay agent
1.Select Menu-$K
2.Select DHCP Relay field
3.Set it to Enable to DHCP relay agent.
46
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Bridging Configuration
5
OVERVIEW OF THE CONFIGURATION
The LRU4240 supports bridging and routing packet processing modes. This chapter contains
procedures on configuring your device for layer 2 bridging applications.
Bridging provides the capability to connect two or more physically separate LAN segments over the
WAN, to create a single logical LAN. Bridging occurs at layer 2 and uses the MAC address
assigned to each LAN device, to either forward or filter frames. Routing forwards IP packets
between two or more IP networks.
NOTE: With the availability of Bridging mode, the proprietary IP Fast Forwarding mode available in the menu will no
longer be supported in the future, and is thereore not documented...
Table 5-1 Bridging configuration procedure
Procedure
Description
Menu
Reference
Setting bridging mode
To configure the unit for Bridging or VLAN Bridging. Menu-$A
In bridging mode, all traffic types including IP is
bridged.
Configuring static MAC
Bridge routes
ports in the MAC to port map table. The entries will be
stored in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) and are
restored at boot time.
Displaying MAC to port
map table
To display the MAC to port map table. View both
learnt and static MC to port mapping entries.
BRIDGING CONFIGURATION
Bridging operates at layer 2 of the OSI model to bridge Ethernet traffic between the LAN and the
WAN and requires little configuration. All traffic types including IP is bridged. The bridge learns
which addresses lay on each side of the bridge and maintains the following information in a MAC
to port map table:
•
•
•
MAC address
Physical interface (Ethernet or Network ports)
DLCI, in Frame Relay mode
The MAC to port map table is used by the bridge in its forwarding decisions.
On a Frame Relay connection, using InverseARP, the bridge discovers the remote subnets connected
on each DLCI and fills the remote end router’s MAC address and the DLCI on which it was
discovered.
On the LAN side as packets flow on the Ethernet, the bridge learns which hosts resides on the local
LAN by storing the source host address in its MAC to port table.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Whenever a packet destined to a particular MAC address is received, the MAC port map table is
consulted, if an entry exists then that packet is transmitted or forwarded on that port. If there are no
entry and the packet is received on the Ethernet port, it is forwarded on all the network ports.
Incoming packets from the network ports are forwarded over the Ethernet port.
NOTE: Current software release does not implement Spanning Tree algorithm to control and eliminate bridging loops.
You will need to avoid bridging loops in your network topology.
Managing the unit in Bridging mode
In bridging mode the unit’s Ethernet port IP address is considered the unit IP address, it is the only
valid IP address. IP traffic coming from the LAN or the WAN with the destination IP address set to
the unit IP address will be processed by the unit as management traffic.
VLAN Forwarding support
The bridge forwards VLAN tagged frames transparently between the LAN and the WAN interfaces.
If the unit ”Management VLAN ID” is set to disabled, IP packets with the destination IP address
matching the unit IP address will be considered as management traffic regardless of the frame’s
VLAN ID value.
Management VLAN ID
To manage the unit with specific VLAN setting, you will need to set the unit “Management VLAN
ID” and “Management VLAN priority” from menu-$A or using the command line interface.
In this case, management traffic is identified by matching the VLAN ID with the unit’s
Management VLAN ID, and the destination MAC address with the Ethernet port MAC address, or
the destination IP address with the unit’s port IP address.
Bridging Application Examples
WAN Gateway for IP VPN Application
Connect to your IP VPN over fractional to full E1 circuit using PPP or Frame Relay. For higher
bandwidth bond the two E1 links using MLFR or MLPPP, provided your Service Provider supports
Multilink Frame Relay or MLPPP services.
The external VPN appliance connected to your LRU4240 initiates and terminates tunnels. The
LRU4240 functions as a gateway to your WAN and transfers IP packets at E1 or dual E1 wirespeed.
Point-to-point LAN Extension
Connect two remote LANs over fractional to full E1 circuits transparently using PPP, or Frame
Relay on a single DLCI. For higher bandwidth bond the two E1 links using MLPPP or MLFR on
Menu-0A.
Multipoint Bridge example
Connect multiple remote LANs over a Frame Relay network. For higher bandwidth bond the two
T1/E1 links using MLFR, provided your Service Provider supports Multilink Frame Relay services.
48
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
For VLAN applications, a VLAN switch is required for VLAN tagging. The LRU 4240 forwards
VLAN tags transparently but does not perform any VLAN tagging.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Configuring Bridging
Table 5-2 Configuring Bridging packet processing mode
Procedure
Description
Setting Bridging over
Frame Relay or Multilink
Frame Relay
1.Select Menu-0A
2.Set Traffic Type to Frame Relay
Encapsulation of bridged frames is RFC2427 compliant.
In multilink mode, the frame header is prefixed with a Multilink Frame Relay
header
1.Select Menu-$A
2.Set Packet Processing Mode to Bridging.
Packets received from the WAN are automatically forwarded to the Ethernet port
In bridging mode Menu $ will be reduced to the following menu selections:
A.Unit Routing Configuration
F. Ethernet ARP Table
G. Mac Bridge
Setting Bridging over
PPP or MLPPP
1.Select Menu-0A
2.Set Traffic Type to PPP
1.Select Menu-$A
2.Set Packet Processing Mode to Bridging.
Packets received from the WAN are automatically forwarded to the Ethernet port
In bridging mode Menu $ will be reduced to the following menu selections:
A.Unit Routing Configuration
F. Ethernet ARP Table
G. Mac Bridge
Enabling Promiscuous
mode
By default in Bridging mode the unit is configured with promiscuous mode enabled.
This mode allows the unit to receive all packets from the LAN network.
Setting bridging route
aging time
Entries in the MAC bridge table are removed automatically when they are inactive
for period of time defined as “Bridge Route Aging Time”. By default the aging time
is 300 seconds and can be set to up to 1,000,000 seconds. To change the default:
1.Select Menu-$A
2.Set Bridge Route Aging Time in seconds
The setting will take effect immediately.
Configuring static MAC Bridge Routes
Enter up to 50 entries in the MAC to port map table. The entries will be stored in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM)
50
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
and are restored at boot time
Table 5-3 Configuring MAC Static routes
Procedure
Steps
1.Select Menu-$GA
Adding a static MAC
bridge entry
2.Select the MAC Address field of an inactive entry
3.Enter the MAC address of the host
4.Select the Interface field
5.Set the Interface field to the physical port NET-1, NET-2, or ENET-0
This identifies the physical WAN or LAN port on which to bridge the MAC
address.
6.Select the DLCI
This identifies the logical DLCI on which to bridge the MAC address.
7.Set the Action field to Add
Deleting a static a static
router
1.Select the Action field of the entry you want to delete.
2.Set the Action field to Delete and press Enter.
Displaying MAC to Port Map Table
The MAC to port MAP table maintains the learnt entries and the static entries . The entries learned
are in active state, aged entries are removed from the table automatically. For each entry the menu
displays:
•
•
•
•
MAC address
Interface: Enet-0 for Ethernet, NET1, NET2 for network interfaces
DLCI for Frame Relay connection
Entry type: Learned for entries learned dynamically; Static for entries entered manually from
menu Menu-$GA; Self the unit’s Ethernet port MAC address
Table 5-4 Displaying MAC to Port Map table
Procedure
Steps
Displaying all MAC to
1.Select Menu-$GB
port entries
2.Type a for all
The menu will display all entries in the MAC to port Map table.
Type n to view next page
Type p to view previous page
Displaying static only
1.Select Menu-$GB
MAC to port entries
2.Type s for static
3.The menu will display all entries in the MAC to port Map table
Type n to view next page
Type p to view previous page
Figure 5-1
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Routing Configuration
6
OVERVIEW OF THE CONFIGURATION
This chapter contains procedures on configuring routing protocols and Network Address
Translation. Routing operates at layer 3, uses destination IP addresses and routing table decisions to
forward packets to the next hop address..
Table 6-1 Router configuration procedures
Procedure
Description
Menu
Reference
Setting Routing mode
To configure the router to routing mode. In this mode
packets will be routed to next hop address based on
static and dynamic route tables.
Menu-$A
Setting default gateway
Configuring static routes
To specify the default router or next hop where the
packet will be forwarded if no routes are found.
Menu-$A
Menu-$C
Menu-$E
To add, modify, or delete static routes that map
destination IP addresses to next hop IP addresses.
Configuring Dynamic
Routing
To configure RIP1, RIP2, and OSPF dynamic routing
protocols through the router CLI.
Configuring load
balancing with
independent links
if more than one route exist to a particular destination, Menu-$C
the routing engine will distribute packets equally
among the routes with equal cost
Configuring NAT
To configure static NAT, dynamic NAT, and
overloading.
Menu-$J
To enable NAT for single network link connection to an Menu-$JC
ISP for internet access.
To enable NAT for dual network network links
connection to two different ISPs. access.
Menu-$JC
Configuring NAT for
To enable internet access through central site for
Menu-$JC
Internet access and Frame remote enterprise networks (Internet backhauling). on a
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
CONFIGURING ROUTING MODE
Table 6-2 Configuring routing mode
Procedure
Steps
1.Select Menu-$A
Setting routing mode
2.Set Packet Processing Mode to Routing
Routing mode is global and applies to all supported interfaces.
CONFIGURING DEFAULT GATEWAY
Table 6-3 Configuring default gateway
Procedure
Steps
1.Select Menu-$A
Setting default Gateway
IP Address
2.Select Default Gateway IP Address field
3.Set IP Address
Enabling default gateway
1.Select Menu-$A
2.Set Default Gateway to Enabled
54
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
CONFIGURING STATIC ROUTES
Static routes lets you define a route that maps the destination IP address received in a datagram to
an egress port or a next hop IP address. A subnet mask is also configured to specify which portion
of the destination IP address is the destination network address portion
6
1
2
4
5
3
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
.
Table 6-4 Configuring static routes
Procedure
Steps
Adding a static route
1.Select the Destination IP field of an inactive route
2.Edit the IP address
3.Select the Len field
4.Enter the subnet mask value of the destination network. Value 0 to32.
The subnet mask is determined by the number of 1’s left justified in a 32-bit
submask field, with the rest of the field set to zeros. The subnet mask
describes how many bits in the destination IP network address are valid, and
are to be matched against incoming packet’s destination address.
5.Select the Next Hop IP field 2 or select the Interface field 3 to enter either the IP
address for routers on numbered interfaces or to enter the egress port.
Enter the IP address for routers on numbered interfaces (Ethernet).
This is the IP address of the router where incoming matching destination IP
packets are sent. This IP address must be on the same subnet as one of the
numbered ports.
Or
Set the egress port to either NET1, NET2, ENET-0, Bundle0. This identifies
the physical WAN or LAN port associated to the route.
6.Set the Metric field 4
The metric specifies the route cost. Enter a number between 1 and 255 to
define the hop count. Use this count to create preferential hops for prioritizing
routing entries.
If more than one route of equal cost is found for a particular destination, the
routing engine will distribute the packets equally among the available routes
using a round-robin algorithm. See “Setting the Metric parameter for Load
Balancing” below.
If multiple routes are found with unequal costs then the route with lesser cost
metric is chosen.
7.Set the Action field 5 to Add
If this new route is accepted by the routing engine the status field 6will change
from Inactive to Active.
If the route is not accepted, the action field 5 will change to Modify. You will
have to change one of the settings in the route and try to add it again.
56
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 6-4 Configuring static routes
Procedure
Steps
Modifying a static router
1.Select the Action field of the route you want to modify.
2.Select Modify
The status of the first column will change to Inactive. You can now select and
change any parameter of the selected static route.
3.Modify the destination IP field 1.
4.Modify the Next Hop IP field 2 or Modify the Interface field 3.
5.Modify the Metric field 4
6.Set the Action field 5 to Add and press Enter.
If the modified route is accepted by the routing engine, the status field 6 will change
from Inactive to Active.
If the modified route is not accepted, the action field 5 will change to Modify. You
will have to change one of the settings in the route and try to add it again.
Deleting a static route
1.Select the Action field 5 of the route you want to delete.
1.Select Delete command
The status of the first column will change to Inactive and the action field will be set
to Delete.
Load balancing over independent links
To load balance traffic between two E1 links to a remote network, you will need to set two routes
with equal cost. Both routes will have the same destination network and different interface (NET1,
NET2).
CONFIGURING DYNAMIC ROUTING
The dynamic routing protocols RIP1, RIP2, and OSPF are configured using the command line
interface accessible from Menu-$E. The router CLI commands and parameters are documented in
appendix E.
NOTE: Standard LRU4240 includes RIP1, RIP2, and OSPF dynamic routing. BGP-4 protocol is available as an optional
dynamic routing protocol.
CONFIGURING NAT
NAT allows the use of private IP addresses when accessing the Internet. Any host with unregistered
IP address must use NAT to communicate with the rest of the world. This service is transparent to
the internal local hosts.
In this documentation “Local” refers to unregistered IP addresses and “Global” refers to registered
IP addresses.
NAT bindings can be done statically, where a given local host may always map to a given global
address, or dynamically where the router assigns to the local host accessing the internet a global
address from the pool addresses given by the ISP.
The Dual Trunk E1 Router supports the following NAT features:
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
•
•
•
Static NAT - To map a unregistered IP address to a registered IP address. This is useful to enable
outside hosts to access an internal IP host of server.
Dynamic NAT - To share dynamically a range of global addresses among internal hosts to access
the internet. Translation occurs when traffic takes place.
Overloading - If the number of global addresses available is less than number of hosts which
need to access internet at the same time, then the port field also can be used for translation.
Unregistered IP addresses are mapped to one or many registered IP addresses.
NAT Configuration menus
NAT is configurable through the TUI menu $J accessible direcly or remotely via Telnet.
Table 6-5 NAT configuration menus
Menu
Description
Menu-$JA Global Map table
Select Add command
Menu-$JB NAT static table
To configure the global IP address ranges to allocate through NAT.
Add the global IP addresses to NAT.
To configure the one-to-one mapping of global IP addresses to local IP
addresses.
Menu-$C-Local address table
To configure the networks that require NAT translation. If the table is empty
no NAT translation will take place.
NAT will translate if the packet source or destination IP address is included
in the Local table.
NAT will not translate if both the packet source AND the destination IP
addresses are included in the local table. This is useful for network scenarios
where filtering NAT, based on source and destination addres, is required.
Menu-$JE NAT Interface
configuration
To enable or disable NAT and NAPT per WAN interface.
Menu-$JF NAT Dynamic entries To verify dynamic operations. You can view the dynamic alloction of global
IP addresses to local host as traffic takes place.
58
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Configuring NAT for single link ISP
Use the following procedure to configure your Dual Trunk E1 Router with dynamic NAT for
internet access to a single ISP
Table 6-6 Configuring NAT with single link ISP
Procedure
Steps
Setting single link NAT
ISP to NET1
Example: You were assigned 14 global IP addresses starting from 100.120.30.02 by
your ISP for NET1
1.Select menu-$JAGlobal Map Table
2.Select Translated IP address field.
3.Enter 100.120.30.02 as the starting global IP address
4.Select subnet mask
5.Enter 28.
6.Set the interface field to NET1
Select the interface on which the network is connected to the ISP.
With 4230 Access Router select NET1.
With 4240 Dual Link Router select either NET1, NET2, or Bundle0
7.Set Action field to Add
Enter local networks that
require NAT translation
1.Select Menu-$JC
Add a row entry in this table for each network you want enable internet access.
2.Select local IP address field of an inactive entry (field set to Delete)
3.Enter the IP address that will be translated
4.Set subnet mask field of the translated network
5.Select interface field
6.Select the connection the translated network is connected to.
Enet0 for directly attached network
NET1, NET2 or Bndl0 for remotely attached network via WAN port.
Optional - Enable
overloading
If you want to share a single global IP address or a range of global IP addresses
among multiple host.
1.Select menu-$JE
2.Set NAPT field to Enabled on the global interface (the network interface through
which the global networks can be reached, NET1 in this example)
Enable dynamic NAT
1.Select menu-$JE
2.Select unit NAT field and set it to enabled
3.Select the global network interface (NET1 in this example) NAT field and set it
to Enabled
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Single link Internet Example
In this typical branch office configuration, a single global IP address is shared by multiple hosts
when accessing the internet via the 4230 single T1/E1 .
Figure 6-1
NAT single link application example
Table 6-7 Single link Internet Access configuration
Steps
Procedure
Setting single link NAT ISP to
NET1
1.Select menu-$JAGlobal Map Table
2.Set Translated IP address field to 100.120.30.02
3.Set subnet mask to 32
4.Set the interface field to NET1
5.Set Action field to Add
Enter local networks that
require NAT translation
1.Select Menu-$JC
2.Select the first row in the table
3.Set Local IF IP Address field to 172.17.1.0. This is the subnet that will be
translated when accessing the internet
4.Set subnet mask field to 24. Assuming the network id is 172.17.1
5.Set Interface field to Enet0
6.Select the connection the translated network is connected to.
Enet0 for directly attached network
Enable dynamic NAT and
overloading
To share the single global IP address among the multiple hosts.
1.Select menu-$JE
2.Select the NET1 row in the table
3.Set NAT field to Enabled
4.Set NAPT field to Enabled
5.Set Two Way NAT to Disabled . (Default setting)
Note: Leave all the fields for both ENET row and NET2 to disabled
Configuring NAT for Multihoming
Use the following procedure to configure your Dual Trunk E1 Router for multihoming, internet
access to two ISPs simultaneously. In the example we’ll configure:
60
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
•
•
NET1 to ISP1 with single global IP address 120.20.30.10
NET2 to ISP2 with 4 global IP address starting from 200.80.100.21.
Table 6-8 Configuring NAT for Multihoming
Procedure
Steps
Setting ISP1 link
1.Select menu-$JAGlobal Map Table
2.Select Translated IP address field.
3.Enter 120.20.30.10 as the starting global IP address
4.Set subnet mask to 32
5.Set the interface field to NET1.
6.Set Action field to Add
Enter local networks that
require NAT translation
on NET1
1.Select Menu-$JC
Add a row entry in this table for each network you want enable internet access.
2.Select local IP address field of an inactive entry (field set to Delete)
3.Enter the IP address that will be translated
4.Set subnet mask field of the translated network
5.Set interface to NET1
Setting ISP2 link
1.Select menu-$JAGlobal Map Table
2.Select Translated IP Address field.
3.Enter 200.80.100.21 as the starting global IP address
4.Set subnet mask to 30.
This will allocate addresses: 200.80.100.21 through 24
5.Set the interface field to NET2.
6.Set Action field to Add
Enter local networks that
require NAT translation
on NET2
1.Select Menu-$JC
Add a row entry in this table for each network you want enable internet access.
2.Select local IP address field of an inactive entry (field set to Delete)
3.Enter the IP address that will be translated
4.Set subnet mask field of the translated network
5.Set interface to NET2
Configuring NAT for Internet access and Frame Relay network
In the example below the enterprise frame relay network central site provides internet access for all
the remote enterprise networks. A single DLCI (200) will be set for Internet access. The central site
router will be configured to:
•
Disable NAT on intranet traffic. IP traffic between central site networks and remote branch
networks will take place without any NAT translation. This will enhance the router
performances.
•
Enable NAT on internet access. NAT translation will take place on any internet traffic from
central network or remote networks.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 6-9 Configuring bundled internet access and Frame Relay network
Procedure
Steps
Setting ISP1 link
1.Select menu-$JAGlobal Map Table
2.Select Translated IP address field.
3.Enter 120.20.30.10 as the starting global IP address
4.Set subnet mask to 32
5.Set the interface field to NET1.
6.Set Action field to Add
Enter the central site and
remote network
1.Select Menu-$JC
Add a row entry in this table for each network you want enable internet access.
2.Select local IP address field of an inactive entry (field set to Delete)
3.Enter the IP address that will be translated
4.Set subnet mask field of the translated network
5.Set interface to NET1
62
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Firewall Configuration
7
The Firewall table is an access list that filters packets by denying or permitting access from source
hosts to destination hosts. The rules are applied according to the order set in each entry in the list.
The first match determines whether or not the packet is accepted or denied by the router. If a packet
passes a first match and is not denied access, subsequent rules are applied on the packet. The default
access setting is to deny all access.
..
Table 7-1 Router configuration procedures
Procedure
Description
Menu
Reference
Configuring Firewall
The Firewall table lets you set an access list of up to
150 entries to permit or deny access based on the
source or destination IP addresses.
Menu-$H
The default Firewall setting is to deny all access.
CONFIGURING THE FIREWALL
You need to enable first the Firewall on menu $A, before you activate entries in the Firewall table.
6
5
1
3
2
4
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
To add an entry to the access list:
Table 7-2 Configuring Firewall
Procedure
Steps
Adding or modifying an
entry
1.Select the Ord field 1 of an inactive route line.
2.Enter an order number between 0 and 511.
The firewall uses a rule based order of execution. This identifies the order of
execution of the entry in the firewall table.
3.Set the Action field 2 to either Deny or Permit.
4.Enter in the Src Address/Len field 3 the IP address and subnet mask of the
host you want to permit or deny access from.
5.Enter in the Dest Address/Len field 4 the IP address and subnet mask of
the host you want to permit or deny access to.
6.Set the SrcIntf field 5 to PPP1, PPP2, or ENET-0.
Src Interface specifies the interface on which the packet was received.
7.Set the Status field 6 to Active
8.Save and activate the entry by pressing k
Entries in the list will be ordered according to the order and the pairs of source and
destination.
Deleting or deactivating
an entry
1.Select the Status field 6 of the selected active route.
2.Set the Status field to Inactive
64
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Diagnostics
8
The Dual Trunk E1 Router offers extensive diagnostic capabilities for local and remote analysis.
These include fixed test patterns and two user-programmable 24-bit test patterns. In addition to
front panel LEDs, the Dual Trunk E1 Router features more than a dozen user-configurable
parameters and performance thresholds for remote alarm reporting.
REQUIRED TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Obtain the following tools and equipment when performing the procedure(s) to isolate the Dual
Trunk E1 Router from the network:
•
•
•
A standard E1 test set, such as a FIREBERD 6000 or equivalent with a E1 Interface and cables.
An RJ-48 plug connector with two patch cords for connecting to the E1 test set.
Protocol analyzer or FIREBERD 500 to capture and analyze PPP protocol layer. Third party
software protocol analyzer tools on PC to use as standard data test set, to capture packets on the
Ethernet layer such as EtherPick, or Snoop command on Unix.
•
Hand tools for attaching and removing cables.
If you do not have any test equipment, you must rely on the network to do most of the
troubleshooting for you.
PERFORMING TESTS FROM THE FRONT PANEL
Using the arrow keys on the front panel, you can perform the following tests. For more information
•
•
•
•
Self Test
Loopback Tests
Pattern Tests
Lamp Test
Self Test
The Self Test checks the unit’s electronic components and performs a signal path check of transmit
and receive directions simulating a 4000-ft E1 line.
The messages are RUNNING SELFTEST, SelfTest Successful, or one of the error
Table 8-1 Self Test Indicators
Indicators
Description
Flash Code Error
CRC of flash copy of executing code failed.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 8-1 Self Test Indicators
Indicators
Description
DRAM CRC Error
Flash Boot Error
Flash Loader Error
Net Error
CRC of RAM copy of executing code failed.
CRC of flash boot code failed.
CRC of flash factory loader failed.
Pattern test failed.
Flash Write Error
Flash write test failed.
Loopback Tests
You can isolate sections of the Dual Trunk E1 Router to determine if it is defective. The problem is
normally in the network.
This section describes each of the loopback tests you can perform from the Dual Trunk E1 Router’s
front panel. The tests are:
•
•
•
Loop NET 1/2
Loop Payload
Loop Up Remote and Loop Down Remote
NOTE: No test is 100% complete and a small portion of the network will remain
untested. Your unit may allow only one active loopback at a time.
NOTE: In the figures that illustrate the available tests, the path for only one Port
(Link) is shown, to prevent overly confusing drawings. If the test is also being run on
the second port, its path will be similar to that shown in the figure.
Loop NET Test
available only on full bandwidth.
This test loops the data received from the network back to the network. The data is regenerated
before it is looped back; however, the unit does not perform additional processing of the data. This
minimizes the impact of the unit during the test so that network problems can be isolated.
This test can loop Net1, Net2, and All Nets.
66
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
LOCAL
Dual Trunk E1 Router
REMOTE
Dual Trunk E1 Router
CSU
DSU
E1
DSU
CSU
Network
Interface
WAN
Data
Port
Network
Interface
E1
Figure 8-1
Loop NET Test
Loop Payload Test
The Loop Payload test verifies proper operation of the unit and the network.
This test loops the payload data received from the network back toward the network. Before it is
looped back, the data is regenerated and a new framing pattern is inserted. Thus, the proper E1
framing of the Dual Trunk E1 Router and network can be verified.
This test can loop Net1, Net2, and All Nets.
Loop Up Remote and Loop Down Remote Tests
Network Loopback using the industry standard set codes. Once in Network Loopback, test patterns
can be sent to verify the Bit Error Rate (BER) performance of the bi-directional E1 network signal.
To place the remote unit into network loopback, the local Dual Trunk E1 Router continuously
transmits the industry standard loop up code to the remote unit. If the remote unit does not go into
network loopback within 15 seconds a failure is declared and the Dual Trunk E1 Router stops
sending the loop up code.
The loop code and network parameters for the local and remote units must match.
Use the Loop Down Remote test to terminate the remote loopback. This test can be used no matter
how the remote unit was put into loopback.
Perform the Loop Up Remote and Loop Down Remote tests from the front panel, user interface or
SNMP.
This test can loop Net1 and Net2, but not All Nets.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
LOOP UP REMOTE
LOCAL
Dual Trunk E1 Router
REMOTE
Dual Trunk E1 Router
DSU CSU
DSU
CSU
E1
Network
Interface
Data
Port
Network
Interface
WAN
Data
Port
E1
LOOP DOWN REMOTE
LOCAL
Dual Trunk E1 Router
REMOTE
Dual Trunk E1 Router
DSU CSU
DSU
CSU
E1
Data
Port
Network
Data
Interface
Port
WAN
Network
Interface
E1
Figure 8-2
Loop Up/Down Remote Test
NOTE: The full bandwidth loop up code puts the remote Dual Trunk E1
Router in a full bandwidth network loopback.
Pattern Tests
QRW Pattern Test
Use the Quasi-Random Word (QRW) test to measure Bit Error Rates on the network. The Dual
Trunk E1 Router sends a QRW pattern into the network and monitors the received E1 network
signal for QRW bit errors. QRW is a good approximation of actual user data. It is also known in the
industry as Quasi Random Signal State (QRSS).
This test also looks for bit errors in both E1 circuit directions when the remote system is looped up.
In this case, the system transmits the QRW to the E1 network; the remote system loops it back to
the Dual Trunk E1 Router which monitors the signal for errors.
You can also use the QRW code to isolate a E1 network problem to a specific transmission
direction. In this case, both E1 transmission directions are monitored when the local and the remote
system transmit QRW (the remote is not put into loopback).
Other Pattern Tests
Table 8-2 Send Test Types Descriptions
Send Test Type
1:7 Pattern
1:1
Pattern Test Description
Stresses the timing recovery circuits of repeaters and other intermediate equipment.
Sends alternate ones and zeros—used to test for bridge taps.
Used for signal power measurements.
All Ones
68
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 8-2 Send Test Types Descriptions
Send Test Type
All Zeros
Pattern Test Description
Used for verification of B8ZS.
1:4 (or Alternate)
The 1:4 code is the loopup remote code. Typically, it is used when the loopup remote test
fails to place the remote system into loopback. You can determine if the failure is an
intermittent or a hard failure by continuously sending the 1:4 code, and monitoring the
network status to see if the pattern is being received.
The selections are available on the full link and on NET 1 and NET 2.
Note: If the Loop Up Remote test fails to place the remote system into loopback, check
that the Loop Code and Network Framing parameters are the same at each end of the link.
1:2
The 1:2 code is the loop down remote code. Use it when the Loop Down Remote test fails
to terminate the remote loopback. You can determine if the failure is an intermittent or
hard failure by continuously sending the 1:2 and monitoring the network status to see if the
pattern is being received.
The selections are available on the full link and on NET 1 and NET 2.
User 1/User 2
These two user programmable patterns (up to 24 characters) let you create a test pattern
rather than use pre-programmed patterns.
Lamp Test
Use this test to verify the LEDs. During the test, all LEDs on the front panel illuminate.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
PERFORMING DIAGNOSTICS FROM THE TERMINAL
Menu-9 Diagnostics
Menu-9, Diagnostics, provides access to diagnostic testing screens and monitoring configuration
performed from the terminal screen menus.
You can run several tests from your system’s internal diagnostics, shown in Menu-9, Diagnostics.
•
•
•
Menu 9A — Physical Layer Diagnostics
Menu 9B — Link Layer Diagnostics
Menu 9C — Delay Monitoring Configuration
Menu-9A Physical Layer Diagnostics
This section describes the Menu-9A parameters and tests.
To verify connections and the E1 line, run the basic diagnostic and pattern tests from Menu-9A,
Physical Layer Diagnostics.
Performing a Test from Menu-9A Physical Layer Diagnostics
To run a test from Menu-9A, Physical Layer Diagnostics:
1. Select the test and the port number in the Test field and set the Test length, USER1 and
USER2 Pattern fields.
2. Follow the screen prompts.
Test results are shown in the upper portion of the screen.
The selections for ports on which the test is performed are Net1, Net2, and on some tests, All Net.
Port is ignored with the Self Test, or Lamp test.
The Inject A Pattern Error option (to inject a single-bit error) is available only when the unit is
sending a test pattern.
PERFORMING DIAGNOSTICS FROM TELNET
NOTE: Performing a test can cut off existing Telnet connections on the
Ethernet and the NET Port. Since certain tests can cut off Telnet connections,
only a subset of tests can be selected when the user logs onto the Dual Trunk
E1 Router by Telnet through the NET Ports.
Certain tests prevent the Telnet session from being disrupted when you Telnet into the unit. Tests
70
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 8-3 Tests Allowed Through Telnet Connection
Test
COM
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NET
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Self Test
Loop Net
Loop Payload
Loop Up Remote
Loop Down Remote
QRW Pattern
1:7 Pattern
3:24 Pattern
1:1 Pattern
All 1s Pattern
All 0s Pattern
1:2 Pattern
1:4 Pattern
User 1 Pattern
User 2 Pattern
Lamp Test
NOTE: You do not need to notify the telephone company that you are running
the tests. However, if the tests reveal a problem with telephone company
service or with the Dual Trunk E1 Router, you should inform the telephone
company that the Dual Trunk E1 Router must be removed from service.
When performing a test, you can:
•
•
Initiate loopbacks and tests on full bandwidth or on NET 1 or NET 2.
Set programmable test patterns
Link Layer Diagnostics and Delay Monitoring
When installing or maintaining wide area connections, you must verify the end-to-end operation of
the WAN links. With dedicated E1 line, you can verify the WAN link by placing the Dual Trunk E1
Router on one end of the line in a loopback test and initiating the transmission of a pattern test from
the other end. The pattern is received and monitored to detect transmission errors.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Link-based Testing for Public Packet Networks
The link-based testing feature qualifies and tests PPP-based networks non-intrusively. Using the
ICMP ping packet, the unit adds pattern generation and packet sequencing that allows single-ended
and collaborative testing. This lets the user test his network from one end to the other using any
TCP/IP-based test equipment. Link-based testing encapsulates a BERT pattern inside an ICMP
message that the remote Dual Trunk E1 Router reflects. The packet can then be directed to test the
network, or LAN port. Patterns supported include 511, 1023, 2047, all 1s, all 0s, and alternating 1s
and 0s.
Delay Monitoring for TCP/IP
The delay monitoring feature provides network delay measurement beyond the link between the
Dual Trunk E1 Router and any IP-addressable device on the network. Blackbox measures delay by
using ping packets, which timestamp and obtain round-trip delays to specific IP addresses. The
traffic added to support the measurement is minimal, and the user can configure the frequency. The
length of the ping packet can allow delay measurements at different frame sizes. A user who is
concerned about bandwidth taken away by the measurement can configure the test for a single, short
ping every few minutes, making the test bandwidth penalty virtually non-existent.
The link-based testing and delay monitoring features allow network managers to test links and
quantify delays, and are especially useful during network installation and trouble isolation. Both
features provide the benefit of circuit-level testing across the network.
Non-Disruptive Testing
The Link Layer Diagnostics and Delay Monitoring are non-disruptive to normal traffic. Unlike hard
loopback tests that affect the line, Link Layer Diagnostics do not take the line out of service.
Depending on the link speed and the test specified, Link Layer Diagnostics uses some of the
bandwidth that would otherwise be available for payload. This bandwidth reduction is negligible if
the test is specified with short and infrequent packets.
On point-to-point networks Link Layer Diagnostics do not disrupt payload traffic.
Menu-9B—Link Layer Diagnostics
Link Layer Diagnostics uses an encapsulated Bit Error Rate Test (BERT) pattern inside ping
messages and reflects the BERT pattern from the remote unit.
1. Select a pattern test.
2. Select the IP address of the equipment to send the PING message.
Select the local or remote router, or the remote Dual Trunk E1 Router.
3. Select a port to test.
Ports are NET, Ethernet, and COM.
4. Select the Test Interval
Select time in seconds between 2 ping messages.
72
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
5. Select the Test Length:
The length of the test can be smaller than the time between two ping messages as specified
in the previous step. If it is, only one ping is sent.
6. Select the test packets length.
From the minimum to the maximum allowed packet length (0 byte to 1500 bytes).
7. Press S to start the test
The Dual Trunk E1 Router begins sending ping messages at the specified intervals.
Press the E key to terminate the test at any time.
The results of this test are:
•
•
•
•
•
Number of packets sent
Number of packets received
Number of errored packets
Number of missing packets
Average round trip delay
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
74
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Monitoring and Management
9
MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT
The Dual Trunk E1 Router collects and displays performance data and other data useful for network
troubleshooting. The Dual Trunk E1 Router monitors the E1 line continuously and displays all
collected data on the terminal screen.
This chapter describes how to monitor the unit status, display performance reports, and configure
alarm conditions.
You can monitor and manage the unit from a terminal, remote terminal Telnet connection, or an
SNMP management station. In addition, if in–band management is enabled, you can monitor and
manage the Dual Trunk E1 Router inband through a Telnet connection or an SNMP network
management station.
The terminal interface has menus which enable you to:
•
•
•
•
•
Display or modify the unit configuration. For more information, refer to “Overview of the
Configuration” on page 33.
Configure alarm conditions, passwords, and modem connections. For more information, refer to
Monitor the status of the unit and the Data Port. For more information, refer to “Menu-2 Data
Monitor the Dual Trunk E1 Router performance database. For more information, refer to
Run diagnostic tests. For more information, refer to “Troubleshooting the Unit” on page 87
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Terminal User Interface Access Methods
Below is a brief review of how to access your Dual Trunk E1 Router for monitoring your unit
for running tests.
•
•
•
Super User versus normal user access rights. For more information, refer to “Configuring
Logging on or off from a terminal. For more information, refer to “Logging On from a
Logging on from a Telnet connection. For more information, refer to “Logging on from a Telnet
MONITORING PERFORMANCE
Each Dual Trunk E1 Router collects and displays performance data as well as additional parameters
to help you troubleshoot problems. To manage and monitor the Dual Trunk E1 Router, use Menu-3,
Reports, to display the unit’s performance reports, which are described further in this chapter.
Additionally, reports on overall link utilization over a variety of intervals are available from Menu
3.
Displaying Performance Reports
Several types of performance reports are available. Select a report in Menu-3, Reports. Type the
corresponding letter or use the up and down arrow keys to move through the menu and press
Returnto select the report.
The first two reports display the carrier and user registers respectively. The carrier registers are the
same as those reported over the FDL in response to FDL requests and can be cleared only by the
carrier.
NOTE: The maximum error count displayed in performance reports is 65,535.
The actual value may be higher.
Performance Reports. For more information, see Menu 3 and its sub menus.
Performance Report Menus
Table 9-1 Performance Report Menus
Description
Menu Screen
3AA - Carrier Registers, Current
Interval
Displays performance data for the most current 15-minute interval.
3AB - Carrier Registers, 24 hour
total
Displays performance data for the last 24-hour period.
76
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 9-1 Performance Report Menus
Menu Screen
Description
3AC - Carrier Registers, 24 Hour Displays performance data organized in 96 15-minute intervals.
Detail
3AE - Carrier Registers, 4 day
Detail
Displays performance data for every 15-minute interval in the last 4
days. (up to 32 screens)
3AF - Carrier Registers, 14 Day
Summary
Displays performance data totals for each day, for the last 14 days
3AG- Carrier Registers, uptime
total
Displays performance data total for uptime interval.
3BA - User Registers, Current
Interval
Displays performance data for the current interval.
3BB - User Registers, 24 Hour
Total
Displays performance data for the last 24-hour period.
Displays performance data organized in 96 15-minute intervals
3BC- User Registers, 24 Hour
detail
3BE - User Registers, 4 day Detail Displays performance data for every 15-minute interval in the last 4 days.
(up to 32 screens)
3BF - User Register, 14 Day
Summary
Displays performance data totals for each day, for the last 14 days
3BG - User Register, uptime total Displays performance data total for uptime interval.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Performance Data Report Events
Table 9-2 Menu-3 Performance Data Report Events
Event
Description
Unavailable Signal State
Payload Loopback Actuated
Current Interval Timer
Errored Seconds (ES)
Unavailable Seconds (UAS)
This state is declared at the onset of ten consecutive SESs.
The unit is in Payload Loopback.
Displays the amount of time in a current interval, 0 - 899 seconds.
A second with one or more CRC or CRC-4 errors.
The number of seconds elapsed after 10 consecutive SES events are
received.
Severely Errored Seconds (SES)
A second during which 832 or more CRC-4 violations or OOF events
have occurred.
Loss of Frame Count (LOFC)
Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS)
Background Block Error
The number of times Loss of Frame is declared.
The number of seconds in an interval in which a controlled slip occurred.
(Background block errors/number of available blocks)*100.
Number of available blocks is (number of available seconds)*1000.
Event Log
The Event Log feature is accessed through Menu-3Z. The Event Log is a running list of system
events such as power on, power off, errors, configuration changes, and test status. When you access
the Event Log, this information is displayed in a table as each even occurs. A complete list of
events indicated by the Event Log are given in the Menu 3Z.
78
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
ROUTING MONITORING
The Dual Trunk E1 Router collects statistics on the following:
Ethernet physical layer
Data ethernet
IP MIB Statistics
Table 9-3 Routing Report Menus
•
•
•
Menu Screen
3FA - Ethernet physical layer
Description
Displays the ethernet protocol statistics which includes FCS errors, total
single collision frames, total number of deferred transmissions, total
number of late collisions, total number of carrier sense errors, and total
number of frames received that are too long.
3FB - Ethernet interface statistics Displays data ethernet statistics which include totals for octets
received/transmitted, unicast packets received/transmitted, non unicast
packets received/transmitted, number of packets received with unknown
protocol IDs, RX packets received with Ethernet errors, and non-routable
RX packets received.
3FC - IP statistics
Displays IP MIB statistics including: totals packets received
3FE - ICMP Receive statistics
Displays performance data for every 15-minute interval in the last 4
days. (up to 32 screens)
3FF - ICMP Transmit statistics
3FG - ARP statistics
Displays performance data totals for each day, for the last 14 days
Displays performance data uptime totals for the NET1, NET2, and
aggregate network port
DELAY MONITORING
The delay monitoring feature in the Dual Trunk E1 Router provides network delay measurement
between the Dual Trunk E1 Router and any device on the network. The LRU4240 measures delay
by using a ping protocol. As part of the pattern generation and packet sequencing, delay
measurement will use the ping packet to timestamp and obtain round-trip delays to specific IP
addresses. This method can measure the delay to any device that implements the TCP/IP protocol,
not just to BlackBox units. The traffic added to support the measurement is minimal, and the user
can configure traffic frequency. The length of the ping packet can allow delay measurements in
different frame sizes. A user who is concerned about bandwidth utilization by the measure can
configure the test for a single short ping every few minutes, making the test bandwidth penalty
virtually non-existent.
The link-based testing and delay monitoring features allow network managers to test network links,
as well as quantify the network delay, and are especially useful during network installation and
trouble isolation. Both features provide the benefit of circuit level testing across the network.
Menu-9C allows you to configure the Dual Trunk E1 Router for delay monitoring. The results of the
test are displayed in Menu-3M.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
MONITORING STATUS
You can monitor the status of the Dual Trunk E1 Router unit from Menu-1, Main Status, and the
status of the single data port from Menu-2, Data Status.
Transmit and receive directions are monitored separately by the unit. The overall link utilization is
reported in Menu-1, Main Status, and the report is updated once per second in each direction.
Menu-1 Main Status
You can monitor the status of the Dual Trunk E1 Router from Menu-1, Main Status. This menu
presents information on unit status, network status, and Ethernet port status.
Main Status Fields
All fields in Menu-1 are read-only.
Unit Status
The Unit Status indicates the Dual Trunk E1 Router is operating normally, or if any special
conditions exist.
Net 1/Net 2 Network Status
The Network Status field presents information on the condition of the received E1 signal.
Data Ethernet Status
Link up and Link down
Clearing Error Counters
1. To clear the error statistics counters, press C.
Do you really want to clear the error counters (Y/N)
2. Press yto confirm, or press any other key to take no action.
Menu-2 Data Status
Menu-2, Data Status, shows the current status of the Ethernet port, it will indicate “Link up” or
“Link down”.
IN–BAND MANAGEMENT
The unit’s in–band management feature provides an easy way to manage Dual Trunk E1 Router
network devices through the data path. This feature eliminates the need for external hardware (i.e.,
serial cable), terminal server, Ethernet hub port, or router AUX port connection to manage the unit.
80
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
In-band Network Registers, 24 Hour Detail
On an in-band enabled system, Menu-3CB shows the performance data which describes l
Table 9-4 Menu-3CB Field Definitions
Field
CRC
Definition
Number of packets received with CRC errors per interval.
Number of received packets per interval.
RxPkt
Rx%
TxPkt
Tx%
Bandwidth utilization in the received direction per interval.
Number of packets sent out per interval.
Bandwidth utilization in the transmit direction during interval.
RMON-2
RMON-2 provides additional SNMP reporting capabilities and the ability to identify the top
bandwidth users.
When using RMON-2 with the Dual Trunk E1 Router, the following RMON-2 groups are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Protocol Directory
Protocol Distribution
Network Layer Host Table
Application Layer Host Table
Network Layer Matrix Table
Application Layer Matrix Table
Protocol Directory
The RMON-2 Protocol Directory lists the protocols that the Dual Trunk E1 Router (agent) is
monitoring on the network. The Dual Trunk E1 Router is capable of monitoring up to 16 protocols
at a time. The default configuration includes the following protocols:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IP
ICMP
UDP
TCP
FTP Control
FTP Data
Telnet
SMTP (e-mail)
DNS
HTTP
NETBIOS Name Service
NETBIOS Datagram Service
NETBIOS Session Service
SNMP
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
•
•
SNMP Trap
Lotus Notes
The Dual Trunk E1 Router uses the limited extensibility feature as defined in RFC 2021.
•
•
The protocol directory can process up to 16 protocols
Each protocol must be a “child protocol” of IP, UDP, or TCP
Using the limited extensibility feature, you can monitor any protocol that rides directly on top of IP,
UDP or TCP. You may define a particular value to be recognized in the demultiplexing field of the
parent protocol.
NOTE: Changes will be stored in volatile memory and not remembered after
the unit has been reset or powered off.
Protocol Distribution
The Protocol Distribution group allows the Dual Trunk E1 Router to discern how much traffic is
being used by a specific protocol. When viewing this data in Choice View, you will be able to
determine which protocols are the biggest users of the network’s bandwidth. This feature is referred
to as Application Top Talkers.
Network Layer and Application Layer Host Tables
RMON-2 allows you to discern which IP addresses are contributing the most traffic to your
network, and further, to drill down and find out which applications on these addresses are
generating the most activity. Identifying these Top Talkers gives you increased control over your
network and bandwidth usage.
The Network Layer Host Table (nlHostTable) provides information on the 256 busiest IP addresses,
while the Application Layer Host Table (alHostTable) lists how much traffic a particular IP address
is sending using a particular protocol. When an IP address has been identified as one of the Top
Talkers, periodically reading the alHostTable with Choice View, will reveal which application on
that IP address is using the most bandwidth.
The table has been implemented so that:
•
•
•
There is one hlHostControlTable entry configured at boot time. Only one entry can exist at a
time. It can be set to monitor the entire E1 (default).
The hlHostControlNIMaxDesiredEntries is set to 256. The Dual Trunk E1 Router builds a table
to monitor the activity of 256 IP addresses .
The hlHostControlAIMaxDesiredEntries is set to 16. You can monitor 16 protocols at a time.
NOTE: If more than 256 IP addresses are detected on the network, the Dual
Trunk E1 Router replaces the least seen entry with the new entry in the
nlHostTable.
82
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Network Layer and Application LayerMatrix Tables
Through the implementation of standardizedRMON2 network-layer matrix (nlMatrix) and
application-layer matrix (alMatrix) groups, the Dual Trunk E1 Router tracks and reports traffic sent
between pairs of network addresses and categorizes them by applications and protocols. Standard-
based Network Management Software tools, such as Concord Health Traffic Accountant, uses
nlMatrix group to generate IP conversation reports, and uses alMatrix to associate the applications
involved in the IP conversations. Up to 1024 conversations can be monitored simultaneously.
Optional ChoiceView Plus software application lets you generate IP conversation reports from
RMON2 data collected by the Dual Trunk E1 Router.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
84
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Alarms
10
This chapter discusses alarm conditions and how these conditions are displayed.
CONFIGURING ALARM CONDITIONS
When the Dual Trunk E1 Router detects an alarm condition, the unit reports the condition to the
terminal.
Depending on your network management environment, the unit may also send alarm messages or
SNMP trap messages.
Set alarm conditions in Menu-8A, Alarm Configuration.
The Dual Trunk E1 Router reports alarm conditions to the device connected to its COMM Port
(such as a terminal or modem)
SNMP traps are sent as configured in Menu-0B, SNMP Configuration; otherwise, the connection
indicated in Menu-8C identifies from where the alarms are reported.
If a modem is connected, the unit causes the modem to dial out (if in Menu 8C, Connection is set to
Modem; valid telephone numbers are set in Phone Number 1 or Phone Number 2; in Menu-8A.
Ethernet Signal Loss Alarmis Enabled and Block all Alarms is set to No).
NOTE: If IP is enabled, only SNMP traps are sent. Alarms will not be
displayed on the terminal.
How Alarm Reports Are Displayed
Alarms are displayed on a terminal at the bottom of the screen when the terminal is connected to the
COMM Port and you are logged on:
Example—Ethernet Signal Loss Alarm will be given at the bottom of the screen, as follows:
??? ID: Oahu Data1 Carrier Loss Start: 07:17:37 Feb.22, 1997--
The alarm includes the unit ID, type of alarm, start or end of alarm condition, date, and time. The
alarm information remains on the screen either until a new alarm occurs or until you select a new
screen.
When no alarm is present, a dotted line (similar in appearance to the one below) is shown:
---------------------------------------------
When you are not logged on, the alarm appears as a single line showing the unit ID, type of alarm,
start or end of alarm, and the time stamp, if IP is disabled.
In SNMP mode, the system sends the alarm as an SNMP trap to the SNMP manager which displays
it on the SNMP console.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Menu-8 Alarm
Menu-8, Alarm, provides access to four sub-menus:
Alarm Configuration
Miscellaneous Management Configuration
•
•
•
•
Modem Initialization Strings
COMM Port Configuration
Select the corresponding option to view and configure parameters for alarm configuration, external
alarm configuration, for miscellaneous management configuration, and modem initialization strings.
For more information on Menu 8, see the 4200 WAN Access Platform TUI Reference Guide.
Menu-8A Alarm Configuration
When you select Alarm Configuration, Menu 8A appears. Menu 8A allows you enable or block
alarm reporting, and select if alarms associated with the Ethernet signal will be reported.
Menu-8C Miscellaneous Management Configuration
When you select Miscellaneous Management, Menu-8C appears. Menu 8C allows you to
configure a variety of parameters including connection, phone numbers, timing and error thresholds.
Menu-8E Modem Initialization Strings
If you select Modem Initialization Strings, Menu 8E appears Each unit can have a maximum of
two modem initialization strings. The first string (String 1) can be equal to or less than 20
characters, and the second string (String 2) can be equal to or less than 60 characters.
To initiate a modem connection:
1. The unit sends +++, followed by the first modem initialization string.
2. The unit then waits for a response from the modem to guard against the possibility of
losing the characters immediately after the modem resets.
3. After receiving the modem response, the unit sends the second initialization string (if
this string is programmed). The Dual Trunk E1 Router assumes that the modem always
sends a response; therefore, do not program the modem not to send a response.
4. If using the modem reset command, you should program everything up to the reset
command as the first modem initialization string.
5. Program the remaining commands as the second modem initialization string.
86
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Troubleshooting
11
TROUBLESHOOTING THE UNIT
This section describes problems you may encounter and provides suggested methods to troubleshoot
and resolve the problems.
UNIT PROBLEMS
Table 11-1 Unit Problems (1 of 4)
Symptom
Probable Cause
Solution
The LRU4240 does not power up. • Unit not plugged in.
• Loose power connector.
• Make sure the unit is plugged into a
live AC outlet, if the unit is AC
powered. If the shelf is DC
powered, make sure the respective
DC leads are not crossed.
• PDU (Power Distributor Unit)
isn’t powered up/on.
• Blown fuse on LRU4240.
• Check to assure that all fuses are
operational; replace as needed. If
the problem persists, call Black
Box Technical Support for
assistance.
• Reversed power leads from DC
supply (standalone).
The LRU4240 system does not
dial out when an alarm occurs.
• Miscellaneous configuration on
Alarm Menu-8C.
• Make sure the connection between
the COMM Port and the modem is
a crossover (null) modem
connection.
• Modem strings 8E not correct.
• Wrong cable.
• A DCE Port is represented the same
way as the modem port.
• No modem attached.
• Make sure Connection is set to
Modem and two valid telephone
numbers are set in Phone Number 1
and Phone Number 2 in Menu-8C.
• Make sure Block all Alarms is set
to No in Menu-8A and the
occurring alarm is set to Enabled.
• If the above solutions do not
correct the problem, call Black Box
Technical Support for assistance.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 11-1 Unit Problems (2 of 4)
Symptom
Probable Cause
Solution
Current user initiated tests
terminate themselves without user
intervention.
• Misconfiguration for Menu-9A
Timeout.
• Make sure the system is set to run
the test for an unlimited amount of
time.
• Test length options are 15 min., 1
min., 60 min., Unlimited.
With Self Test, Loop Up Remote
and Loop Down Remote, Unlimited
does not apply.
• If the above step does not correct
the problem, call Black Box
Technical Support for assistance.
The system cannot be put into
network loopback from the remote
unit.
• Unit does not recognize Loop
command being sent.
• Make sure the remote unit is
sending the correct loop code.
• Loopback detect is disabled on
unit.
• Make sure the system is set to
receive the same standard or
alternate code as the remote unit.
• Circuit is down or in Loop towards
remote unit.
• Using your E1 test set, send a loop
up code into the system. If the
system still does not loop up, call
Black Box Technical Support for
assistance.
The system cannot be put into
payload loopback from the
network.
• Framing protocol choice.
• Make sure the system is set for
T1.403 Annex B fractional
loopback code, if the network is
sending T1.403 Annex B to loop it
up.
• Wrong timeslots used for test
signal.
• Make sure the payload portion you
are attempting to loop up has
assigned bandwidth.
• If the LRU4240 still does not loop
up, use your E1 test set to inject a
fractional loopback signal into the
payload you wish to loop up.
• If the above steps fail, call Black
Box Technical Support for
assistance.
After power-up, the menu clock no • Time not set.
• Set the time in Menu-4.
longer shows the correct time or
date.
• If the time is still incorrect, call
Technical Support.
88
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 11-1 Unit Problems (3 of 4)
Symptom
Probable Cause
Solution
No response from any unit on the • Bad cable.
communication network.
• Make sure that Pin 8, CTS, is not
connected at the ASCII terminal
end of the COMM Port cable.
• Wrong baud rate.
• Hung terminal. Restart terminal
session.
• Standard Black Box COMM Port
cables do not have this connection
at the ASCII terminal end. Some
ASCII terminals will activate the
CTS line, and thus interfere with
the LRU4240 collision avoidance.
• Get a null modem adapter to cross
pins 2 and 3 (transmit and receive)
on the terminal.
• The COMM Port cable is connected
to an inactive or faulty port on the
terminal, or the terminal is faulty.
• Replace the COMM Port cable if it
is faulty.
• Make sure the COMM Port
parameters match the terminal’s
parameters.
No response from some units on
the network.
• Mismatch baud rate.
• Break in cable.
• Make sure the LRU4240 is
powered up.
• Make sure the unit ID is correct.
• Swap the connector positions with
a unit that has no problem
communicating with the terminal,
to find out if a portion of the
COMM Port cable is faulty.
• Make sure the COMM Port
parameters match the terminal’s
parameters.
Invalid data is received from one
or all units on the network.
• Baud rate configuration.
• EMI.
• Make sure the COMM Port
parameters (on the problem units)
match the terminal’s parameters.
• Two units with the same ID.
• Verify that none of the units are
missing an ID and that no two units
have the same unit ID.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 11-1 Unit Problems (4 of 4)
Symptom
Probable Cause
Solution
Some invalid data is received
mixed in with a mostly good menu
display.
• Refresh screen image.
• To refresh screen, press
Ctrl-L.
• 1 or more units are missing at ID,
or two units have the same ID.
• Reduce the baud rate on the units
and terminal if you are using the
maximum (38400 baud) for
communicating with a very large
number of units.
• If the cable from the network to the
terminal exceeds the 15 m (50 ft.)
maximum, fix the length.
• Verify that none of the units are
missing an ID and that no two units
have the same unit ID.
NETWORK PROBLEMS
Table 11-2 Network Problems (1 of 4)
Symptom
Probable Cause
Solution
The unit experiences a loss of
signal or a loss of frame on the
Network Port.
• Equipment Failure
• Test E1.
• Apply hardware loop to front of
unit.
90
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 11-2 Network Problems (2 of 4)
Symptom
Probable Cause
Solution
• Run a lamp test from Menu-9,
Diagnostics to make sure the LEDs
are working.
The NET LED does not
illuminate.
• No incoming signal.
• Bad LED.
• Make sure the E1 line from your
service provider is connected to the
RJ-48C female connector on the
back of the LRU4240 NTU.
• Remove the E1 line from the back
of the LRU4240 and place the E1
test set in its place. Connect the
transmit of the E1 test set to the
receive of the network plug (pins 3
and 11, 3—tip, 11—ring). If the
NET LED changes to any color,
i.e., green or red, contact your
service provider for assistance with
cutting over the E1 line.
• Place the E1 loopback plug on the
network connector on the back of
the LRU4240. If it then changes
color, troubleshoot your test setup.
• If the NET LED never lights, call
Black Box Technical Support for
assistance.
The NET LED is constantly red.
• Constant out-of-sync or out-of-
frame on E1.
• Make sure the E1 line framing
format matches the LRU4240’s
framing format.
• Misframe/FE.
• Check the LRU4240 for excessive
errors.
• Carrier has problem.
• Configuration doesn’t match
framing.
• In CRC4-Enabled mode, check for
CRC and CV; in CRC4-Disabled
mode, check for CVs only. If
excessive errors appear, place your
E1 test set or your loopback plug
on the RJ-48C or BNC socket on the
back of the system to see if the
errors stop.
• If they do, contact your service
provider for assistance.
• If the errors do not stop, call Black
Box Technical Support for
assistance.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 11-2 Network Problems (3 of 4)
Symptom
Probable Cause
Solution
The NET LED remains constant
amber/yellow.
• Incoming RAI or UAI.
• Check to see if the LRU4240 is
receiving a RAI alarm or an AIS
alarm.
• Make sure the remote/far end
system is receiving a proper E1
signal. If it is not, it will be
generating a RAI alarm towards
your equipment.
• If the system is still receiving a RAI
alarm, place the E1 test set or the E1
loopback plug on the RJ-48C or
BNC socket on the back of the
LRU4240. If the RAI alarm stops,
contact your service provider for
assistance.
• If, after all above steps have been
satisfied, your LRU4240 still shows
a yellow NET LED, call Black Box
Technical Support for assistance.
92
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 11-2 Network Problems (4 of 4)
Symptom
Probable Cause
Solution
• Make sure the timing source is
properly configured. Timing should
be set to NETWORK if the network
is the source.
The NET LED flickers
intermittently between red, amber
and green.
• Receiving errors on NET Port
(CV, CRC, FE, etc).
• If it is not the source, timing should
be set to INTERNAL at one E1 end,
and NETWORK at the other end.
• If you’re not sure that the network is
the source, contact the network
provider and discuss your circuit
order. The provider will tell you if
the E1 network is the source.
• If the timing source is properly
configured and the NET LED
continues to flicker between red,
amber and green, isolate the system
with the E1 test set to see if the
problem clears.
• Place the E1 test set into the proper
timing mode (provide timing or
recover timing). You cannot use the
loopback plug in this application
since it would require us to provide
timing and would not allow us to
see if we can recover timing from a
valid E1 source.
• If the NET LED continues to
flicker, call Black Box Technical
Support for assistance.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
94
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Specifications
A
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Item
Rating
Maximum Packet Length
• 65535 bytes (for payload traffic)
• 1536 bytes (for SNMP management)
Maximum Packet Rate
11,000 packets/sec duplex. Dual Trunk E1 Router
will discard packets over this amount
LRU4240 Network Interface
Item
Rating
Transmit bit rate
Receive bit rate
Line code
2.048 Mbs ± 50 ppm
2.048 Mbs ± 75 ppm
HDB3
Framing
ITU-TS G.704/CTR 12
ITU-TS G.703/CTR 12
ITU-TS G.823/CTR 12
ITU-TS G.703/CTR 12
Network 1, Network2 , or Internal
0 to -26 dB
Pulse shape
Jitter
Output level
System timing
Input level
Impedance
75 Ohm (BNC) unbalanced or 120 Ohm
(RJ-48) balanced
LRU4240 Data Interface
Item
Specification
Ethernet 10BaseT
Interface types
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Power Options
Item
Specification
AC Power
Universal Power Supply
100 VAC to 240 VAC Autoranging, 50/60 Hz
DC Power
-40 VDC to -78 VDC
Through two-position Phoenix connector
Power Consumption
9 W maximum per unit
Physical
Item
Specification
Dimensions
8.75 in W (22.2 cm) x 1.75 in H (4.4 cm) x 12 in
depth (30.4 cm)
Weight
6.5 lb (3.0 kg)
RJ-48
Network Connector
COMM Port Connector 8 Pin modular
Ethernet Management
Interface
RJ-45 socket
Environmental
Item
Specification
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Altitude
0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F) ambient
-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
0% to 95% noncondensing
15,000 ft (4.6 km)
Reliability
MTBF 12 years minimum
LRU4240 Diagnostics
Item
Diagnostics And Tests
Loopbacks
E1 Network, E1 Payload, Fractional E1 Payload
Set/Reset Code, Front Panel, COMM Port
E1 Loopback Control
Fractional Payload
Loopback Control
CCITT V.54 Sequence, COMM Port
96
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Item
Diagnostics And Tests
Test Patterns
QRW, 1:1, 1:7, 3:24, All 1s, All 0s, 2-User Programmable 24 Bit Patterns, bit error
injection
Alarm Parameters
E1 Network Port
NET Carrier Loss Alarm
NET Sync Loss Alarm
NET AIS Alarm
NET RAI Alarm
CRC, CV, FE Threshold Alarm
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table A-1 Default Configuration (1 of 2)
Configuration
Factory Default Settings
Your Configuration
Unit Configuration
Unit ID
Protect Mode
Idle Code
Unique ID assigned
Disabled
0xFF
In-band Monitoring
Link Monitored
Enabled
Net 1 (in independent links)
Net (in MLPPP mode)
Network port 1 Configuration
CRC4
Main Sync Source
Alternate Sync Source
Enabled
Network
Internal
Network port 2 (Aux)
Configuration
CRC4
Main Sync Source
Alternate Sync Source
Enabled
Network
Internal
Diagnostic Configuration
User Pattern 1
User Pattern 2
001100110011001100110011
000000010000000100000001
Alarm Configuration
Block All Alarms
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Net Carrier Loss Alarm
Net UAI received Alarm
Net RAI received Alarm
Loss of Signal from data port
Net Sync Loss Alarm
CV Threshold Alarm
CRC Threshold Alarm
Ethernet loss signal Alarm
FE Threshold Alarm
SNMP Configuration
1st NMS Address
1st Output Port
0.0.0.0
COM
2nd NMS Address
2nd Output Port
0.0.0.0
COM
3rd NMS Address
3rd Output Port
0.0.0.0
COM
Get Community String
Set Community String
Trap Community String
public
public
public
98
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table A-1 Default Configuration (2 of 2)
Configuration
Factory Default Settings
Your Configuration
COMM Port and Terminal
Configuration
Direct
Connection
10 minutes
Timeout when Logged on
Timeout when not Logged on
COMM Port
Unlimited
38400, 8, no parity, 2 stop bits
Enabled
Terminal Mode
Phone Number 1
Phone Number 2
Normal User Password
Superuser Password
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Not Assigned
Modem String Configuration
Modem String 1
ATEOVOZO
Modem String 2
ATV0E0Q0F1C1S0=1S2=43S3=13S4=10S7=30S12=50&C1&D0
Ethernet Configuration
IP Address
0.0.0.0
IP Mask
0.0.0.0
IP Gateway
0.0.0.0
MAC Address
(Unique ID assigned)
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
100
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Cable and Connector Pin Assignments
B
E1 NETWORK PIN ASSIGNMENTS
The pin assignments for the RJ48 network interface connector are listed in the Table B-1 below.
Table B-1 Network Interface Pin Assignments
RJ48 Pin
Signal
5
Send toward Network Tip (T1)
Send toward Network Ring (R1)
Receive from Network Tip (T)
Receive from Network Ring (R)
NC
4
2
1
3, 6, 7, 8
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
COMMUNICATION PORT PIN ASSIGNMENTS
Table B-7 describes the COMM Port (RJ45) pin assignments.
Table B-2 Communication Port Pin Assignments
RJ45 Pins
Signal
SD
Description
3
6
Send Data (from Dual Trunk E1 Router to terminal)
Receive Data (from terminal to Dual Trunk E1 Router)
Clear To Send (I/O to all Dual Trunk E1 Routers only)
Signal Ground (bi-directional)
RD
1
8
CTS
SG
4, 5
7
DCD
Carrier Detect
1. CTS is used by the Dual Trunk E1 Router as a collision avoidance line. This line should not be
connected at the CRT terminal end of the COMM Port cable.
DE-9 to DB-25 Adapter Pin Assignments
BlackBox can provide a DE-9 to DB-25 adapter for the BlackBox DE-9 COMM Port ribbon cable.
The pinout assignments for the adapter are listed in Table B-8 below.
Table B-3 DE-9 to DB-25 Adapter Pinouts
DE-9
DB-25
3
2
7
8
6
5
1
9
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
23
21
102
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Software Upgrade
C
SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD
The Download feature enables you to upgrade software, and includes the following capabilities:
•
Separates the downloading operation from switching to new software, where these operations
can be performed at separate times. You can schedule a time at which the unit can be initialized
with the new code.
•
•
Command remotely using SNMP the TFTP/XModem download and code switching
The unit stores two images of executable code; you can switch between the two images.
•
Enables downloading of the new software while the unit is operational and passing data. The
code can be downloaded through:
•
•
Xmodem via the terminal user interface using an asynchronous connection.
TFTP from a network management station to the unit via SLIP using an asynchronous
connection or through NET or Ethernet Ports in-band.
•
TFTP via Ethernet.
Using the Download Menu Utility
Use the Download Utility menu, accessed through Menu-4, Main Configuration, to download
software updates. You may use the Xmodem protocol or TFTP. When switching from one
executable image to another, the operational software in the unit is restarted, which results in a
temporary service interruption lasting from one to two minutes.
During the download sequence, the Power/Test LED will blink alternating red and green.
Setting Up for Xmodem
To download new software:
1. Insert the new software diskette in the drive of the PC.
2. From Menu-4 Main Configuration, type F(as instructed in the menu for FLASH
Download) to start the download session.
3. Menu 4F (Software Download Menu) will appear
4. Select the Protocol (Xmodem or TFTP) to Xmodem under Protocol.
5. Press Ato start the download.
Setting Up for TFTP
Use these steps to set up for TFTP::
1. Set the download protocol in the Download utility to TFTP.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
2. Press A in the Download Utility menu.
3. Start TFTP for the Network Management System, and indicate binary mode.
Abnormal Termination
The following list summarizes scenarios during which the downloading process may fail:
•
•
•
Software load is corrupted.
Transmission errors.
Failure of the downloading computer, the modem (if one is used), the connection between the
downloading computer and the unit or a failure of the unit, which also includes a power failure.
•
•
User aborted the download process.
Time-out built into the Xmodem or TFTP protocols.
Typically, abnormal termination of the download process leaves the Code File in a non-usable state.
In this case, the Download Utility will indicate that the Code File is unavailable.
Error Indicators
If the download utility fails, an error indicator appears in the Download Utility menu. Depending on
apprised of the condition:
Table C-1 Download Utility Error Indicators (1 of 2)
Error
Error Type
General
Indicator
Description (Message)
1
Software error. Note the specific error information, and call Black Box
Technical Support.
2
Load Received is corrupted.
Load Received has invalid embedded length.
Load Received is invalid for this unit.
Flash-ROM Not Supported.
3
4
Hardware
Xmodem
5
6
Flash-ROM With Protected Sector.
Flash-ROM Failed To Erase.
Flash-ROM Failed To Program.
Xmodem Abort Received.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Xmodem Data Timeout.
Xmodem Invalid Sequence.
Xmodem Unexpected Data.
Xmodem Packet Timeout.
Xmodem Packet Corrupted.
Xmodem Failed to Acknowledge.
104
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table C-1 Download Utility Error Indicators (2 of 2)
Error
Error Type
Indicator
Description (Message)
Xmodem Reserved.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Xmodem Reserved.
Xmodem Reserved.
TFTP
TFTP Error Packet Received
TFTP Invalid Mode.
TFTP Invalid Opcode.
TFTP Unexpected Opcode Sequence.
TFTP Invalid Packet Length.
TFTP Invalid Data Packet Sequence.
TFTP Request Timeout.
TFTP Data Packet Timeout.
TFTP Failed to Acknowledge.
Download Aborted by User
You may abort the Xmodem downloading process by pressing Ctrl-x.
To perform the downloading abort, instruct the terminal emulator program to abort the Xmodem
download process and return to terminal mode. The specific procedure depends on the terminal
emulator program being used. The recovery is the same as explained under Abnormal Termination.
With TFTP, the procedure to discontinue the TFTP session depends on the TFTP setup. Again, the
recovery is the same as explained under Abnormal Termination.
Table 11-3 Menu 4F Download Utility (1 of 2)
Group
Field
Description
CODE FILE
1 Version
Version of the operational software residing in Code-File 1. This field
reads “Absent” if there is no operational software stored in this code-file
or if the operational software is corrupted.
2 Version
Version of the operational software residing in Code-File 2. This field
reads “Absent” if there is no operational software stored in this code-file
or if the operational software is corrupted.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table 11-3 Menu 4F Download Utility (2 of 2)
Group
Field
Description
DOWNLOAD
Code File
The Code-File that will receive the downloaded operational-code, and
that is currently not operational.
Status
Shows the status of the download, and is either Idle, Start, In Progress,
Verifying, Success, or error. This field is updated after an Xmodem
download to the local unit. If the status is “Error”, then a number
associated with the failure indicates the specific problem.
Error
Indicates a specific problem during download.
Bytes Received
Shows the number of bytes received during the download. This field is
updated after an Xmodem download to the local unit.
Protocol
Protocol used for the download. Choices are Xmodem and TFTP.
CHANGE
Code File
Code-File to be switched over when the scheduled time is reached.
Choices are NONE, 1, and 2. NONE indicates that no change is desired,
and can be used to cancel a scheduled change.
Method
Either SCHEDULED or NOW. NOW indicates that the change occurs
immediately, and SCHEDULED indicates that the change occurs when
the actual time reaches the scheduled time.
Scheduled Date
Scheduled Time
Count Down
Expressed in DD/MM/YY (day, month, and year) at which the switch-
over will occur.
Expressed in HH:MM:SS (hours, minutes, seconds) at which the switch-
over will occur.
Shows the time interval HH:MM:SS (hours, minutes, seconds) for the
switch-over to occur after it has been initiated. If the switch-over has not
been initiated, then it shows “Press 2 To Start” or “Press 4 To Start” for
the local unit and the remote unit, respectively.
Programming software upgrades remotely
Starting with software release 2.3RT, you can initiate the code download and initialization remotely
using SNMP commands. The Menu-4 download utility commands, download method (TFTP or
Xmodem) and schedule date and time, have associated SNMP variables in the eclipse MIB.
The sample script shown below illustrates a remote TFTP download:
#!/bin/ksh
NODE="172.25.150.1"
BIN_FILE="074-04240-01sr2.3RT.bin"
snmpset $NODE .1.3.6.1.4.1.300.200.2.49.1.0 integer 1
tftp $NODE <<EOT
bin
put $BIN_FILE
quit
106
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
EOT
snmpget 172.25.150.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.300.200.2.49.5
snmpget 172.25.150.1 .1.3.6.1.4.1.300.200.2.49.9
SOFTWARE-ONLY UPGRADES
All upgrades to the 4200 WAN Access Platform are software-only upgrades. The hardware unit ships
from the factory with all the physical ports even if they are not used with the configured software. The
physical ports include two serial DTE ports, two T1/E1 ports, COMM port, and Ethernet port.
Changing software
You can also change the software configuration of your 4200T/E . For example you can reconfigure
your unit from a 4210 CSU/DSU to a 4230 Access Router. This configuration change requires
downloading a new software code into the unit, configuring the software menus, and changing the
network and DTE connections.
Contact BlackBox Technical support to obtain any software upgrade.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
108
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Menus
D
This appendix lists all of the Dual Trunk E1 Router Menus and their descriptions.
Table D-1 Router Menus (1 of 5)
Menu
Number Name
Description
Page
0
IP Configuration
Selection menu for following submenus:
• Interface configuration
• SNMP configuration
• Ethernet configuration
• Performance monitoring configuration
• LMI configuration
• SLA configuration
0A
Interface Configuration
Traffic type (PPP or Frame Relay), Multilink, Interface IP addresses
(Ethernet, Network, and COMM ports).
0B
0C
0E
0F
SNMP Configuration
Ethernet Configuration
Performance monitoring
LMI configuration
SNMP Traps, NMS IP addresses andcommunications Settings.
Configure data speed mode (Full or half duplex).
Frame Relay performance monitoring.
Enable LMI and set polling and error parameters. Set UNI-U or UNI-N
interfaces.
0H
0L
1
SLA configuration
Frame Relay SLA FRF.13 configuration
Outage source configuration Reserved. Do not use.
Main Status
NET2.
2
3
Ethernet Data Status
Reports
Shows the status of the ethernet port. “Link up” or “Link Down”.
None
Access to carriers and users registers reports, inband reports, SLA reports,
Ethernet and IP statistics.
3A
Carrier Reports
Carrier Reports lets you access network ports physical layer statistics.
Select which of the NET1, NET2, or aggregate carrier registers to display.
Use n (for next) and p (for previous) to select which of the three network
ports (NET1, NET2, or aggregate) you want to view statistics.
3AA- Carrier Registers,
Current Interval
Real-time statistics for current interval.
3AB- Carrier Registers,
Total Over 24 Hours
Net statistics in for last 24 hours. Summary.
Net statistics for last 24 hours in 15-minute intervals.
Net statistics in 384 15-minute intervals.
3AC- Carrier Registers, 24
Hour Detail
3AE- Carrier Registers, 4
Day Detail
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-1 Router Menus (2 of 5)
Menu
Number Name
Description
Page
3AF- Carrier Registers, 14
Day Summary
Net statistics for last 14 days. Summary.
Net statistics for uptime interval.
User Reports submenu.
3AG- Carrier Registers,
uptime total
3B
User Reports
3BA- User Registers,
Current Interval
Net statistics for the current interval
Net statistics for last 24 hours. Summary.
Net statistics in 96 15-minute intervals.
3BB- User Registers, 24
Hour Total
3BC- User Registers, 24
Hour Detail
3BE- User Registers, 4 Day Net statistics in 384 15-minute intervals.
Detail
3BF- User Registers, 14 Day Net statistics for last 14 days. Summary.
Summary
3BG- User Registers, uptime Net statistics for uptime interval. Summary.
total
3C
In-band Reports
Inband Reports submenu.
3CA- In-band Ethernet
Registers, current interval
Provides detail inband Ethernet Registers for the current 15 minutes
interval.
3CB- Inband Network
Registers, current intervall
Provides detail on inband network registers for the current 15 minutes
interval.
3CC- Inband Ethernet
registers, 24 Hour total
Shows inband Ethernet registers in 96 fifteen-minute intervals.
Displays inband network registers in last 96 fifteen minutes
Displays inband ethernet registers lifetime counters.
3CE- Inband Network
registers, 24 Hour tota
3CF- Inband Ethernet
registers, lifetime total
3CG- Inband Network
registers, lifetime total
Displays inband network registers lifetime counters.
3CH- Inband Ethernet
registers, 24 hour details
Inband Ethernet registers performance data for the last 24 hours.
Inband Network registers performance data for the last 24 hour detail
3CI- Inband Network
registers, 24 hour detail
3E
PPP statistics
Displays the PPP Link Control Protocol (LCP) and Network Control
Protocol (LCP) statistics enabling you to troubleshoot PPP and MLPPP
sessions.
110
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-1 Router Menus (3 of 5)
Menu
Number Name
Description
Displays the SLA reports submenu
Page
3E
In Frame Relay mode:
SLA Reports
3EA
DLCI Outages
DLCI basis. As specified in FRF.13, outages are defined as either Fault
(Outages) or Excluded.
3EB
3EC
Frame Transfer Delays
Provides information on the number of threshold violations per DLCI.
Local Transmit Data
Delivery Report
Provides information on the network’s (per DLCI) effectiveness in
transporting data. It also provides the DDR for data delivered within CIR,
and data delivered in excess of CIR.
3EE
Local Receive Data Delivery Provides information on the network’s (per DLCI) effectiveness in receiving 120
Report
data. It also provides the DDR for data received within CIR, and data
received in excess of CIR.
3EF
3EG
3FA
Local Transmit Frame
Delivery Report
at packet transmission.
Local Receive Frame
Delivery Report
Ethernet physical layer
Displays the ethernet protocol statistics which includes FCS errors, total
single collision frames, total number of deferred transmissions, total number
of late collisions, total number of carrier sense errors, and total number of
frames received that are too long.
3FB
Ethernet interface statistics
Displays data ethernet statistics which include totals for octets
received/transmitted, unicast packets received/transmitted, non unicast
packets received/transmitted, number of packets received with unknown
protocol IDs, RX packets received with Ethernet errors, and non-routable
RX packets received.
3FC
3FE
IP statistics
Displays IP MIB statistics including: totals packets received
ICMP receive statistics
(up to 32 screens)
3FF
ICMP tranmist statistics
ARP statistics
Displays performance data totals for each day, for the last 14 days
3FG
Displays performance data uptime totals for the NET1, NET2, and
aggregate network por
3M
Delay monitoring results
Displays results of “Delay Monitoring configuration” tests initiated from
menu-9C
3Z
4A
4B
4F
4T
Event Log
Alarm History log.
Unit Configuration
Set general configuration parameters.
Net Configuration and Status View status of individual links and choose line setting for each port.
Download Utility Screen
GMT Time sync
Configure time and date synchronization (RFC868).
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-1 Router Menus (4 of 5)
Menu
Number Name
Description
Page
4V
Timezone configuration
menu-4T (RFC-868).
When RFC 868 is used to get time, time server provides GMT. If a unit is
deployed in different time zone user needs to configure the units
appropriately.Day light savings ends in October.
6A
6A
MLFR Configuration
View and set the following Multilink Frame Relay configuration
parameters: Link Integrity Timer, Link Acknowledge, and Retry Counter.
PPP/MLPPP Unit
configuration
View and set PPP configuration parameters.
6B
6B
6Z
7
MFR port configuration
PPP/MLPPP Port Status
Timeslot Configuration
Features
View link status and protocol errors per link.
View link status and protocol errors per link.
Fractional E1 speed configuration and port mapping to Ethernet data port.
Reserved for software feature key upgrades.
8
Alarm
Alarm Selection submenu.
8A
8C
Alarm Configuration
Allows user to enable/disable alarms and to set alarm thresholds.
Miscellaneous Management Dial out, passwords, alarm port settings.
Configuration
8E
8F
8G
Modem Initialization Strings Setting menu for modem initialization strings.
36
Comm port configuration
User authentication server
Configure the comm port speed
Configure Radius authentication protocol. See “Configuring Radius
Authentication” on page 36
8O
9
Reboot the unit
Rebooting the unit remotely using TUI menu
Tests and diagnostics selection menu.
Diagnostics
9A
9B
9C
Physical Layer Diagnostics
Link Layer Diagnostics
E1 Net testing by patterns, loop, selecting loop codes on/off.
Menu for In-band testing.
Delay Monitoring
Configuration
Configuration for Delay Monitoring. Results are displayed in Menu-3M.
$
Routing Configuration
Main router configuration menu
$A
Unit Routing configuration
Configuration routing mode, default gateway IP address, enable Firewall,
and Load balancing.
$B
$C
$E
Display routing table
Static routing table
View routing configuration tables (static and dynamic routes)
Configure static routes.
Routing Command Line
Interface (CLI)
Allows you to configure the dynamic routing protocols (RIP1, RIP2, and
OSPF) See “Kernel Command Reference” on page 164.
$F
Display ARP Table
View ARP cache table.
$H
Firewall Table
Configure access lists.
112
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-1 Router Menus (5 of 5)
Menu
Number Name
Description
Page
$IA
$IB
Static Frame Relay Map
config
Configure manually DLCI to IP address mappings. See “Configuring Frame
Relay DLCIs” on page 33
Display active Frame Relay View current DLCI to IP address mappings. If inverse ARP is enabled on an
Map Table
interface, DLCI to IP address mappings is automatically learnt.
Manually configured mappings are also displayed on this menu.
$JA
$JB
$JC
$JE
NAP/NAPT configuration -
Global Map table
Configure global IP addresses and mapping to network interfaces. See
“Configuring NAT” on page 54
NAP/NAPT configuration -
Static table
Assign manually global IP addresses to local hosts. See “Configuring NAT”
on page 54
NAP/NAPT configuration -
Local address table
Configure local networks requiring NAT. “NAT Configuration menus” on
page 54
NAT Configuration
Enable or disable unit NAT configuration.
Enable/Disable NAT, overloading (NAPT) per network interface.
$JF
$K
NAT Dynamic entries
DHCP configuration
Displays current global IP addresses allocated through NAT.
Enable/Disable DHCP relay and configure DHCP relay server IP address
Table D-2 Menu-0A - Interface configuration
Parameter
UNIT
Parameter—Options ; Definition
In-band monitoring
Enables or disables in-band monitoring.
Traffic Type
Set WAN protocol to PPP or Frame Relay.
The selected WAN protocol applies to all WAN interfaces. In PPP mode all the TUI
menus will be configured for PPP operations. In Frame Relay mode all the TUI menus
will be configured for Frame Relay or Multilink Frame Relay operations.
Multilink Protocol
• Select Yes to enable multilink PPP (MLPPP) or multilink Frame Relay (MFR)
according to the selected traffic type set above. Both T1/E1 links will be bonded as a
single virtual connection and will be identified as bundle0.
• Select No to enable independent E1 links. The two E1 links will be identified as
NET1 and NET2.
COMM
IP Address
Set the COMM port IP Address in standard IP form (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn).
Len
Set the IP mask
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Parameter
ENET
Parameter—Options ; Definition
IP Address/Len
Set the Ethernet port IP Address in standard IP form (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn).
Len
Set the subnet mask (1 to 32) which is the part of the IP address shared by all
devices on the same network
ICMP Redirect
Enable or disable sending ICMP Redirect message on ENET interface
NET1
NET2
IP Address/Len
Set the first network port IP address that is responded to for in-band traffic received
from the NET1, in standard IP form (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn).
Len
Set the IP mask
IP Address/Len
Set the second network IP address that is responded to for in-band traffic received from
the NET2, in standard IP form (nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn).
Len
Set the IP mask
Table D-3 Menu-0B SNMP Configuration
Parameter
Description
COMMUNITY
Get
Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters). The router SNMP agent uses
this text string to check GET requests for the SNMP configuration from the SNMP
management station.
Default: public
COMMUNITY
Set
Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters). The router SNMP agent uses
this text string to check SET requests from the SNMP management station to set the
SNMP configuration.
Default: public
COMMUNITY
Trap
Enter an alphanumeric text string (max—32 characters) which the router SNMP agent
inserts in SNMP traps it sends to the SNMP management stations
Default: public
TRAP
Enter the IP address of the first Network Management Server. The router sends trap
1st NMS IP Address
messages to this server.
Default: 0.0.0.0
TRAP
2nd NMS IP Address
Enter the IP address of the second Network Management Server. The router sends trap
messages to this server.
TRAP
3rd NMS IP Address
Enter the IP address of the third Network Management Server. The router sends trap
messages to this server.
Note: If all three trap NMS IP addresses are set, the router sends a trap to all three
network management servers.
TRAP
COMM, ENET, NET
1st Output Port
Selects the DLCI (if applicable) and port over which the router will send a trap to the
1st NMS IP address.
114
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-3 Menu-0B SNMP Configuration
Parameter
Description
TRAP
COMM, ENET, NET
2nd Output Port
Selects the DLCI (if applicable) and port over which the router will send a trap to the
2nd NMS IP address.
TRAP
COMM, ENET, NET
3rd Output Port
Selects the DLCI (if applicable) and port over which the router will send a trap to the
2nd NMS IP address.
Table D-4 Menu-0C Ethernet Configuration
Parameter
Description
MAC Address
Data speed mode
ProxyARP
Read-only Ethernet port MAC address assigned at factory.
Ethernet port speed 10MB/Half (default) or 10MB/Full
Reserved for IP Fast Forwarding mode. This feature is no longer supported.
Enable or disable ProxyARP in Fast forwarding mode. Default is disabled.
Net directed broadcast
mode
Reserved for IP Fast Forwarding mode. This feature is no longer supported.
Configurable option available in Fast Forwarding mode only. Enter the network
directed broadcast IP address mask
Fwd Multicast
Reserved for IP Fast Forwarding mode. This feature is no longer supported.
Configurable option available in Fast Forwarding mode only. Enable or disable
forwarding mulcast packets.
Table D-5 Menu-0E Performance Monitoring Configuration
Parameter
Interface
DLCI
Parameter - Options; Definition
The network interface (NET1, NET2, or NET) to which the DLCI is attached
DLCIs will be autodiscovered if LMI is enabled on menu-0F. If LMI is not enabled, the
DLCIs must be entered manually on this table.
To change a DLCI status to Deleted, enter a zero for the DLCI number. If LMI is
enabled, and the DLCI still exists, it will be discovered again and its status returned toa
active.
Default: 0
CIR
The Committed information rate. If LMI revision 1 is being used, this will be
discovered; otherwise, you will need to enter the CIR for each DLCI
Default: 0
Delay Threshold
The range is 0 to 64000 milliseconds. When the round trip delay over the PVC exceeds
this value:
• An event will be registered in the Event Log
• A trap will be sent to the NMS (if configured)
• An alarm message will be displayed on the terminal user interface
• A delay threshold violation is counted
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-5 Menu-0E Performance Monitoring Configuration
Parameter
Parameter - Options; Definition
Status
Active - Passing data through the Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC)
Inactive - PVC is broken
Deleted - PVC is not available
Table D-6 Menu-0F LMI Configuration
Parameter
Enable
Parameter- Options; Definition
Enable or disable LMI
Type
Select between Annex A, Annex D, and LMI revision 1.
Default: Annex D
Enquiry Tx Timer
Sets the interval between STATUS ENQUIRY messages. Set the value between 5 and
30 seconds, in increments of 5.
Default: 10 seconds
Full status count
Max Lmi Error
Enquiry Rx Timer
Sets the number of polling cycles for Link Verification before the unit generates the
Full Status request. Set the count to an integer between 1 and 255
The number of errors that can occur on the LMI link before the reporting that the
interface is down.
Sets the number of seconds between the sending of a STATUS ENQUIRY and the
reception of the response. Set this value to an integer between 5 and 30, in increments
of 5.
Default: 15 seconds
Unit Location
Select UNI-U or UNI-N.
Table D-7 Menu-0H SLA Configuration
Parameter
Description
Enable -
Set this field to Enabled to collect SLA data
Default: Disabled
FDR/DDR Sample
Period
Set the sampling period between 1 minute and 255 minutes. The time period represents
the time interval between requests to the far end of the PVC.
Default: 1
FDR Threshold
Set this threshold between 0% and 100%. 0% means this feature is disabled.
Configurable to one thousandth of a percent (for example, 99.999%). When the FDR
falls below this threshold:
• An event is sent to the Event Log
• A trap will be sent to the NMS (if configured)
• An alarm message will be displayed on the Terminal User Interface
• An FDR threshold violation is counted0%
Default: 0%
116
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-7 Menu-0H SLA Configuration
Parameter
Description
DDR Threshold
Set this threshold between 0% and 100%. 0% means that this feature is disabled.
Configurable to one thousandth of a percent (for example, 99.999%). When the DDR
falls below this threshold:
• An event is sent to the Event Log
• A trap will be sent to the NMS (if configured)
• An alarm message will be displayed on the Terminal User Interface
• A DDR threshold violation is counted0%
Default: 0%
Delay Period
Set the Delay Period between 1 minute and 255 minutes. This figure represents the
time interval between delay measurements on each PVC.
Default: 1
Delay Packet Size
Set the Delay Packet Size between 50 bytes and 1500 bytes. This figure represents the
size of Request and REsponse packets used to measure delay.
Default: 128
Table D-8 Main-1 Status
Parameter
Description
Unit status
Indicates the Dual Trunk E1 Router is operating normally, or if any special
conditions exist.
Network status
Ethernet status
Displays information on the condition of the received T1 or E1 signal.
Indicates if the Ethernet link is up or down.
Link1/Link 2 status
Indicates the status, up or down, of the network link 1(NET1) and network
link 2 (NET2).
Table D-9 Menu-1 Unit Status (1 of 2)
Indication
Description
Normal
No abnormal conditions exist.
Unit is running self test.
Unit is in network loopback.
Unit is in payload loopback.
Unit is sending User 1 pattern.
Self Test
Net Lpbk (port)
PLD Lpbk (port, fraction)
Send User 1 (port, fraction)
port = Net1 or Net2
Send User 2 (port, fraction)
Send 1:1 (port, fraction)
Send 1:2 (port, fraction)
Send 1:4 (port, fraction)
Send 1:7 (port, fraction)
Send 3:24 (port, fraction)
Unit is sending User 2 pattern.
Unit is sending alternate 1s and 0s.
Unit is sending standard loopdown remote code continuously.
Unit is sending standard loopup remote code continuously.
Unit is sending 1:7 pattern.
Unit is sending 3:24 pattern.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-9 Menu-1 Unit Status (2 of 2)
Indication
Description
Send QRW (port, fraction)
Send All 1s (port, fraction)
Send all 0s (port, fraction)
LP UP Remote (port, fraction)
LP DN Remote (port, fraction)
No clock
Unit is sending QRW code.
Unit is sending all ones signal.
Unit is sending all zeros signal.
Unit is sending loopdown code to remote site for 15 seconds.
Unit is sending loopup code to remote site for 15 seconds.
Main clock source has failed.
Lamp Test
Unit is undergoing Lamp Test.
Table D-10Menu-1 Network Status
Description
Indication
Normal Operation
Loss of Signal
No abnormal conditions exist.
Network signal is missing.
Network frame is missing.
AIS/keep alive.
Loss of Frame
AIS Alarm Received
RAI Alarm Received
Set Code Received
Reset Code Received
Excessive CRC Errors
Excessive OOF Errors
Unit has received RAI
Unit has received set code.
Unit has received reset code.
Unit has exceeded BPV threshold.
Unit has exceeded OOF threshold.
Table D-11 Menu-3A Carrier Reports and 3B User Reports
Event
Default
Unavailable Signal State - In ESF mode, this state is declared at the onset of ten consecutive
No
SESs.
Current Interval Timer - Displays the amount to time in a current interval, 0 - 899 seconds.
0
0
Errored Seconds (ES) - In ESF framing, a second with one or more ESF frame errors or CRC-
6 errors.
Unavailable Seconds (UAS) - In ESF mode, the number of seconds elapsed after 10 consecutive
SES events are received.
0
0
0
Severely Errored Seconds (SES) - In ESF mode, a second during which 320 or more CRC-6
violations or OOF events have occurred.
Bursty Errored Seconds (BES) - In ESF mode, a second with two CRC-6 errors to 320 CRC-6
errors.
Background Block Error (BBE) -
118
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-11 Menu-3A Carrier Reports and 3B User Reports
Event
Default
Loss of Frame Count (LOFC) - In ESF mode, the number of times Loss of Frame is detected.
0
0
Controlled Slip Seconds (CSS) - In ESF mode, the number of seconds in an interval in which a
controlled slip occurred.
Table D-123C Inband reports
Event
Default
Seconds in interval - elapsed time, in seconds
(counter)
FCS (Frame Check Sequence) - current count of the number of frames that have arrived with
(counter)
FCS errors.
Overrun - overrun condition is detected by receiver. If receiver is unable to receive frames,
because it does not have buffers to place the received frames. This condition occurs if
the frames are received at a very high rate.
(counter)
Errored Seconds - a second with one or more frame errors
Discarded frames - current count of thrown-away data blocks
Received packets - current count of arrived data packets
Received octets - current count of arrived data bits
(counter)
(counter)
(counter)
(counter)
(value)
Received Usage - the octet arrival rate as the percentage of the link speed.
RxUsage = (rxOctets•B)•100/dataRate•timeInterval)
Transmitted packets - current count of sent data blocks
Transmitted octets - current count of sent data bits
(counter)
(counter)
(value)
Transmitted Usage - the octet transmission rate as the percentage of the link speed.
TxUsage = (txOctets•B)•100/dataRate•timeInterval)
Table D-13Menu-3EA DLCI Outages
Indication
DLCI
Description
Identifies the DLCI.
Outage State
Included Outage
Outage State may be Included, Excluded, or None.
These columns present data collected on unscheduled service outages. The Count
column provides the number of INcluded outages on the DLCI since the last reset.
The Time column provides the number of unscheduled minutes the DLCI was down.
Excluded Outage
These columns present data collected on outages that are scheduled or unavoidable.
These outages include down time scheduled for maintenance, and down time
attributable to acts of nature such as flood. The Count column provides the number
of Excluded outages on the DLCI since the last reset. The Time column provides the
number of minutes the DLCI was down due to an Excluded outage.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-14Menu-3EB Frame Transfer Delays Report Definition
Indication
Description
DLCI
Identifies the DLCI.
Last Sample Time
Threshold Violations
Total Samples
Average Delay
The time of the most recent sample.
The number of times the delay threshold has been exceeded.
The number of samples that have been taken.
Average Delay is calculated by taking the sum of the total delay and dividing it by
the number of samples collected.
Maximum Delay, Last n
Samples
This column is subdivided into three columns. Here you will find the single longest
delay during the last 15 samples, 30 samples, and 60 samples.
Table D-15Menu-3EC Local Transmit Data Delivery Report Definitions
Indication
DLCI
Description
Identifies the DLCI.
Last Sample Time
The time of the most recent sample.
Threshold Violations
The number of times the DDR threshold has been exceeded.
The number of bytes transmitted within CIR.
Local Transmit Within
CIR
Local Transmit Above
CIR
The number of bytes transmitted above CIR.
Far End Within CIR
Receive Above CIR
Number of bytes received at far end within CIR.
Number of bytes received at far end in excess of CIR.
Table D-16Menu-3EE Local Receive Data Delivery Report Definitions
Indication
DLCI
Description
Identifies the DLCI.
Last Sample Time
The time of the most recent sample.
Threshold Violations
The number of times the DDR threshold has been exceeded.
Local Receive Within CIR The number of bytes received within CIR.
Local Receive Above CIR The number of bytes transmitted above CIR.
Far End Transmit Within
CIR
Number of bytes transmitted within CIR from the far end.
Number of bytes transmitted in excess of CIR from the far end.
Far End Transmit Above
CIR
120
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-17Menu-3EF Local Transmit Frame Relay Delivery Report
Indication
DLCI
Description
Identifies the DLCI.
Last Sample Time
The time of the most recent sample.
Threshold Violations
The number of times the DDR threshold has been exceeded.
The number of frames transmitted within CIR.
Local Transmit Within
CIR
Local Transmit Above
CIR
The number of frames transmitted above CIR.
Far End Within CIR
Receive Above CIR
Number of frames received at far end within CIR.
Number of frames received at far end in excess of CIR.
Table D-18 Menu-3EG Local Receive Frame Delivery Report
Indication
DLCI
Description
Identifies the DLCI.
Last Sample Time
The time of the most recent sample.
Threshold Violations
The number of times the DDR threshold has been exceeded.
The number of frames transmitted within CIR.
Local Transmit Within
CIR
Local Transmit Above
CIR
The number of frames transmitted above CIR.
Far End Within CIR
Receive Above CIR
Number of frames received at far end within CIR.
Number of frames received at far end in excess of CIR.
Table D-19 Menu-3FA Ethernet physical layer
Parameter
Description
FCS Errors
FCS errors
Single Collisions
Defer Transmit
Late Collisions
Carrier Sense Errors
Frames Too Long
Total number of single collisions
Total number of deferred transmissions
Total number of late collisions
Total number of carrier sense errors
Total number of frames received that are too long
Table D-20 Menu-3FB Ethernet interface statistics
Parameter
Description
Octets Received
Total number of octets received
Total number of octets transmitted
Octets Transmitted
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Parameter
Description
Unicast Packets Received
Unicast Packets Transmitted
Non Unicast Packets Received
Non Unicast Packets Transmitted
Unknown Protocol ID
Total number of unicast packets received
Total number of unicast packets transmitted
Total number of non-unicast packets received
Total number of non-unicast packets transmitted
Protocol ID unknown
Protocol Packet Dump
Unroutable Packets
Total number of Rx packets received with Ethernet errors
Total number of unroutable packets received
Table D-21 Menu-3FC IP Statistics
Parameter
Description
Packets Received
Total number of packets received
Header Errors Received
Address Errors Received
Forwarded Datagrams
Unknown Protocol Received
Discards <Rx>
Total number of packet header errors
Total number of packet address errors
Total number of forwarded datagrams
Total number of packet unknown protocols
Total number of packet discards received
Total number of packet discards transmitted
Total number of In-band packets received
Total number of requests transmitted
Discards <Tx>
Packets Delivered
Requests Transmitted
Reassembly Required
Reassembly Successful
Reassembly Failed
Total number of packet fragments requiring reassembly
Total number of successful packet reassemblies
Total number of failed packet reassemblies
Total number of successfully fragmented IP packets
Total number of packet fragments failed
Total number of packet fragments created
Fragmentation Successful
Fragmentation Failed
Fragments Created
Table D-22 Menu-3FE ICMP receive statistics
Parameter
Description
Messages Received
Total number of messages
Errors Received
Total number of packet header errors
Total number of unreachable destination messages
Total number of packets with time exceeded
Total number of packets with parameter problems
Total number of packets with source Quenches
Total number of packet redirects
Destination Unreachable (Rx)
Time Exceeded (Rx)
Parameter Problems (Rx)
Source Quench (Rx)
Redirects (Rx)
122
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Parameter
Description
Echos (Rx)
Total number of packet echo requests
Echo Replies (Rx)
TimeStamps (Rx)
TimeStamp Replies (Rx)
Address Masks (Rx)
Address Mask Replies (Rx)
Total number of packet echo replies
Total number of packet timestamp requests
Total number of packet timestamp replies
Total number of packet address masks requests
Total number of packet address masks replies
Table D-23 Menu-3FF ICMP Transmit statistics
Parameter
Description
Messages Transmitted
Errors Transmitted
Destination Unreachable <Tx>
Time Exceeded <Tx>
Parameter Problems <Tx>
Source Quench <Tx>
Redirects <Tx>
Total number of messages
Total number of errors
Total number of packets with unreachable destinations
Total number of packets with time exceeded
Total number of packets with parameter problems
Total number of packet source Quenches
Total number of packet redirects
Echos <Tx>
Total number of packet echo requests
Total number of packet echo replies
Total number of packet timestamp requests
Total number of packet timestamp replies
Total number of packet address masks requests
Total number of packet address masks replies
Echo Replies <Tx>
TimeStamps <Tx>
TimeStamp Replies <Tx>
Address Masks <Tx>
Address Mask Replies>
Table D-24 Menu-3FG ARP Statistics
Parameter
Description
Requests Received <All> Total number of ARP requests received
Requests Received <For
Me>
Total number of requests received from me
Replies Sent
Total number of ARP replies sent
Total number of ARP replies received
Total number of ARP requests sent
Replies Received
Requests Sent
Table D-25 Menu-3M Delay Monitoring
Indication
Avg
Description
Average delay in milliseconds
Maximum delay
Max
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Indication
Lost
Description
number of packets lost
Bad
number of packets with checksum errors.
number of packets transmitted
Set
Table D-26 Menu-3Z Event Log
Parameter Description
Default
Module
Unit, Network, System, All
All
This field allows the display of any of the above status changes.
When Unit is selected, the following status changes will be logged as
events:
Event
Unit Power On
Self Test
Net Loopback (port)
Payload Loopback (port, fraction)
Loop Up Remote (port, fraction)
Loop Down Remote (port, fraction)
Send User 1 Pattern (port, fraction)
Send User 2 Pattern (port, fraction)
Send 1:1 Pattern (port, fraction)
Send 1:2 Pattern (port, fraction)
Send 1:4 Pattern (port, fraction)
Send 1:7 Pattern (port, fraction)
Send 3:24 Pattern (port, fraction)
Send QRW Pattern (port, fraction)
Send All 1’s Pattern (port, fraction)
Send All 0’s Pattern (port, fraction)
No Clock
Lamp Test
Send Keep Alive
Controlled Slip
Inject a Pattern Error
Clear Pattern Error Counter
Clear Event Log
Clr Current Carrier Registers
Clear Carrier Archives
Clear Current User Registers
Clear User Archives
Clear User CRC Errors
Clear User BPV Errors
Clear User OOF Errors
Clear All User Error Counters
Clear 24 Hour User Registers
Back to Factory Config
124
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Parameter Description
Default
Event (cont.) Loss of Signal
Loss of Frame
Set Code Received
Reset Code Received
UA1 Received
CV Threshold Exceeded
FE Threshold Exceeded
CRC Threshold Exceeded
External ALarm Asserted
Power Outage
UAS Outage
Flash N.V. Log Error
Clear User 4 Day Archive
Clear User 14 Day Totals
Module
When All is selected, all of the preceding status changes will be logged as
events.
When Network is selected, the following status changes will be logged as
events:
Network
Loss of Signal
Loss of Frame
Set Code Received
Reset Code Received
BPV Threshold Exceeded
CRC Threshold Exceeded
OOF Threshold Exceeded
When AUX is selected, the following status changes will be logged as
events:
Loss of Signal
Loss of Frame
Module
Event
When System is selected, the following status changes will be logged as
events.
External Alarm
Power Supply Failure
This field allows a particular type of event to be displayed
Enter an event index or use the Up/Down keys to scroll through the event
options. While selecting the event, the event description text changes with
the index. The event description text is displayed under the Description
column in the Event Log menu.
0, All
If the Event field is left blank, the Event filter parameter is disabled.
Seq. No.
Status
This value uniquely identifies an event in a certain unit. This field is read
only.
Identifies the condition of the event described in the description field. This
field is read-only.
Module
Identifies the module type. This field is read-only.
Description
Identifies the status change/event. This field is read-only.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Parameter Description
Default
Time/Date
Identifies the time the status change/event was logged.
Table D-27Menu-4A Unit Configuration
Parameter
UNIT
Description
Protect Mode - Enabled or Disabled;
Enabled - Protect mode prevents you from running tests from the front
panel.
Yellow Alarm - Enabled or Disabled;
Enabled - The unit detects and generates a Yellow Alarm.
Disabled - The unit does not detect or generate a Yellow Alarm.
NETWORK
Main/Alt Sync - INT, NET1, NET2
Selects the E1 network transmitter’s clock source. First specify the Main
clock source value, then the Alternate. (Each clock source has the same
options.)
Type yto confirm each action.
NET: Select this option if the network is the clock source. If it is not, set to
Int at one E1 end, and NET at the other end.
Table D-28Menu-4B Net Configuration and status
Parameter
NET 1/2
Description
Framing
Selects the Network T1/E1 framing format.
E1: CRC4 enabled, CRC4 disabled, and unstructured
(
Line Impedence
View setting of E1 line impedence (75 ohm or 120 ohm)
Table D-29Menu-4T GMT Time synchronization
Parameter
Time/Date
Description
Automatic Sync
Set automatic synchronization to Enabled or Disabled.
Default: Disabled
How Often
Set the frequency of how often to synchronize the time with the time server (Days,
hours, minutes, seconds)
Next sync
Time Src
Displays synchronization count down and next scheduled synchronization
Configure primary and secondary time server IP addresses and port of which time
servers are connected
Attempts
Displays count of access attempts to time server
126
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table D-30Menu-4V Timezone configuration
Parameter
Description
Ahead GMT
Set this to Yes if unit is deployed to the east of GMT. Set NO if the unit is deployed
in to the west of GMT.
Hrs. Offset From GMT
Mins. Offset From GMT
DST
Offset hours from GMT from 0 to 23
Offer minutes from GMT from 0 to 59l
Enable or disable Daylight Savings Time. Set to Enable If user’s timezone supports
Daylight Savings Time.
Hrs. of Difference during Number of hours saved during Daylight Savings Time
DST
Mins. of difference during Number of minutes saved during Daylight Savings Time
DST
DST Start week
DST Start month
Week of the month in which Daylight Savings Time starts
Month when Daylight Savings Time starts.
Table D-31Menu-6A PPP/MLPPP Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Description
Keepalive Timer
Controls the messages of the keepalive (echo request) messages after the link(s)
is(are) negotiated
Keepalive Timeout
Retry Counter
Controls how long an end point should wait for “ech response” after ending “echo
request”
How many unsuccessful “echo requests” should be attempted before a link is
declared down
Table D-32Menu-6A Multilink Frame Relay Configuration Parameters
Paramete
r
Description
Default
10
MFR
Link Integrity Timer - controls rate of MFR protocol messages
Link Acknowledge - controls rate of MFR protocol acknowledgement messages
Retry Counter - number of retransmission attempts for MFR protocol
Discarded Frames - (status) number of invalid MFR frames discarded
Local Bundle Identifier - (status) local identifier for logical T1 bundle
Remote Bundle Identifier - (status) remote identifier for logical T1 bundle
4
2
(counter)
(ID no.)
(ID no.)
Local
Table D-33Menu-6B PPP/MLPPP Port Status
Parameter
Port 1/2
Description
Include In Service - Yes, No
Status - Normal, Idle, Down, and Loopback Detected
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Parameter
Description
Protocol Error - Number of PPP/MLPPP protocol errors detected in this port.
Table D-34Menu-6B Multilink Frame Relay Port Configuration and Status
Paramete
r
Description
Include In Bundle - Yes, No
Default
Yes
Port 1/2
Status - Normal, Idle, Down, Remote Not Configured, Inconsistent Bundle,
Unknown Vendor, Loopback Detected, Test Active, Remote Link Up, and Awaiting
Remote Link
(status)
Protocol Errors - number of MFR protocol errors detected on the port
Local Bundle Identifier - (status) local identifier for logical T1 bundle
Remote Bundle Identifier - (status) remote identifier for logical T1 bundle
(counter)
(ID no.)
(ID no.)
Local
Table D-35Menu-7 Feature Keys
Parameter
Default
RMON – PPP and Frame Relay RMON1 statistics
Service Level Agreement (Frame Relay SLA FRF.13)
RMON 2 - Protocols and application monitoring
Access Router 2 Ports –
Capable
Capable
Capable
Capable
Not capable
Capable
Access Router single port
Dynamic Routing --
Table D-36Alarm Configuration
Primary
Parameter—Options;
Parameters Definition
Default
NET Alarms Block All Alarms—Yes, No
Yes—Blocks the reporting of all alarms.
No—Enables the unit to report alarms.
No
Carrier Loss Alarm—Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
Enabled—The unit generates an alarm when a network carrier Loss of
Signal is detected on the network.
Disabled—Disables the alarm.
Sync Loss Alarm—Enabled, Disabled
Enabled—The unit generates an alarm when loss-of-frame is detected on Enabled
the network.
Disabled—Disables the alarm.
128
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Primary
Parameter—Options;
Parameters Definition
Default
NET Alarms AIS Received Alarm—Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
Enabled—The unit generates an alarm when a Network AIS (Alarm
Indication Signal) is detected.
Disabled—Disables the alarm.
RAI Received Alarm—Enabled, Disabled
Enabled—The unit generates an alarm when a Network RAI Alarm is
detected.
Enabled
Disabled—Disables the alarm.
Table D-37Menu-8C Miscellaneous Management Configuration
Parameter—Options; Definitions
Connection—In-band, Modem, Direct
Select the type of connection you are using.
In-band—Enables an in-band connection to the unit.
Modem—Enables a modem connection to the unit.
Direct—Enables a direct terminal connection to unit.
Timeout When Logged On—1 Min, 10 Min, 30 Min, Unlimited
Applies only when you are logged on. This is the time span after which, if it does not
detect activity, the system warns that you will be logged off in 30 seconds.
Timeout When Not Logged On—1 Min, 10 Min, 30 Min, Unlimited
Applies only when a terminal is connected through a modem and you are not logged
on.This is the time span after which the modem disconnects the phone line if no
activity is detected.
Phone Number 1
Enter a Hayes-compatible modem dial string (20 char. maximum); for example,
“atdt555-1212”. The modem dials out using the first telephone number, then
automatically tries the second telephone number if the first does not respond.
Phone Number 2
Enter a Hayes-compatible modem dial string (20 char. maximum); for example,
“atdt555-1212”.
Normal User Password—(text string)
Enter the login password for the Normal User (20 char. maximum).
Super User Password—(text string)
Enter the login password for the Super User (20 char. maximum).
DLC IBC Link Loss Alarm—Enabled or Disabled
The IBC link specific to Dual Trunk E1 Router. When the connection is disrupted,
an alarm is sent.
Dial Out Time Interval—Dial out time interval is the minimum amount of time the
Dual Trunk E1 Router waits between dial outs to the host computer.
In-band Link Loss Alarm—Enabled or Disabled
Enabled—When loss of HDLC frames or idle characters occurs, an alarm is generated.
Disabled—The alarm is disabled
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Parameter—Options; Definitions
In-band CRC Error Threshold—Enable or Disabled
Enabled—The valid range for this is 4 x 10-7 to 9 x 10-1.
Disabled—No alarm is generated if threshold rate of errors is high.
Table D-38Menu-8E Modem Initialization Strings
Parameter
Default
N/A
String 1 – Modem initialization string can be up to 20 characters.
String 2 – Modem initialization string can be up to 60 characters.
N/A
Table D-39Menu-8F Comm Port configuration
Parameter
Default
COMM PORT – Baud Rate
Parity
38400
None
Word Length
Stop Bits
8
2
DCD – Enabled or Disabled
Disabled
Enabled – The Multilink Select uses the modem’s Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
signal to provide more robust modem operation.
Disabled – Use Disabled if your null modem does not pass the Data Carrier
Detect signal.
XON/XOFF – Disabled, XOFF until ANY, XOFF until XON
XOFF until ANY – Ctrl-S stops data flow from unit, any key resumes data
flow.
Disabled
XOFF until XON – Ctrl stops data flow from unit, Ctrl-Q resumes flow.
Disabled – XON/XOFF feature disabled.
Table D-40Menu-9A Physical layer diagnostics
Field
Definition — Options
Default
Choosing a test by number
You may type in a number to select a test, instead of using
the arrow keys. For instance, if you type in “3,” you will
select the Net Lpbk test.
Current Test
Pattern Test
Displays the test currently running. If no test is selected, the Idle
field reads Idle.
If no pattern test is running, the test reads idle. When a
pattern test is started, it will read Searching. When the
current pattern test is locked, it displays locked
seconds. Locked secondsis a 16-bit counter
saturating at 65536. The counter resets to 0 when the
current pattern is lost. The counter label will change to
Relocked Secondsif the current pattern is lost and
found again.
Options: Idle, Searching, Locked, and Relocked
130
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Field
Definition — Options
Default
Pattern Error Counter
The number of pattern errors occurring during the current
test. This will only display when Pattern Test reads
Locked Secondsor Relocked Seconds.
0
CRC (or CRC4) Errors
Code Violations
The number of CRC (or CRC4) errors occurring during the
current test.
0
0
0
0
The number of Code Violations occurring during the
current test.
Out of Frame Event
Indicates 2 bits out of 4 bits framing errors for both ESF
and D4 modes
Frame Error Event
Last Self Test Result
Indicates 2 bits out of 4 bits framing errors
The result of the last test performed. Read only.
0 (if no self-test
has been
Options:
Self Test Passed
Error nn (0 to 5)
performed)
Next Test (port, fraction)
The next test to run is set in this field. Options:
1. Self Test†
Self Test
3. Loop NET
4. Loop Payload*
5. Loop Up Remote *
6. Loop Down Remote*
7. QRW Pattern*
8. 1:7 Pattern*
9. 3:24 Pattern*
10. 1:1 Pattern*
11. All 1s Pattern*
12. All 0s Pattern*
13. 1:2 Pattern*
14. 1:4 Pattern*
15. User 1 Pattern*
16. User 2 Pattern*
17. Smart Jack Set‡
18. Smart Jack Reset‡
19. Lamp Test†
*All of these tests offer the option of selecting which
fraction of the T1/E1 signal the test applies to (NET1,
NET2). FULL applies to the entire T1/E1 signal
(including IDLE timeslots).
Next Test Length
The length of the next test is set in this field.
15 min., 1 min., 60 min., Unlimited
Unlimited
With the Self Test, Loop Up Remote and Loop Down
Remote, this parameter does not apply.
Full Bandwidth Loop Code The Loop code to use in the next test is set in this field.
Standard
Standard
Options: Standard, Alternate, Disabled
Fractional Loop Code
The Loop code to use in the next test is set in this field.
Options: Standard, Alternate, Disabled, and ITU-T V.54
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Field
Definition — Options
Default
USER 1 Pattern and USER Enter any sequence of 1s and 0s, between 1 and 24
1 —
2 Pattern
characters in length. With D4 framing, make sure your
pattern meets density requirements.
001100110011001
100110012—
The parameters and options in the upper test status section 000100010001000
of Menu-9 Diagnostics are given next. 10001000
Table D-41Menu-9B Link Layer diagnostics options
Type
Parameter — Definition
Default
Current
Test — The test that is currently running. Display only. Idle
Link — The IP address, DLCI and Port on which the
test is currently running. Display only.
Empty
Status
Sent Packet — The number of packets sent in the
0
current test. Display only.
Received Packets — The number of packets received in
0
the current test. Display only.
Errored Packets — The number of packets containing
errors sent in the current test. Display only.
0
0
Status
Missing Packets — The number of packets that were
lost in the current test. Display only.
Average Round Trip — The average length of the
round trip from local to remote in the current test.
Display only.
0
132
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Type
Next
Parameter — Definition
Default
Test —
Ping 511
pattern
Selects the type of test to run next.
Options: Ping 511
Ping 1023
Ping 2047
Ping 1:1
Ping All 1s
Ping All 0s
IP Address — nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn
0.0.0.0
The IP address on which the test is to be run.
DLCI, Port — The DLCI and Port out which the test is 16,NET
to be run. The DLCI specified must be between 0 and
1024. The port can be NET, DTE, ENET, and COMM.
Test Length — The number of minutes the test is to
last. Selecting a length of zero will choose unlimited
duration.
0
Test Interval — The number of seconds between test
packets.
0
Packet Size — The size of the packet sent in the test.
100
Table D-42Menu-9C Delay Monitoring configuration
Parameter-Definition
Default
State
Not Running
(disabled)
Enables or disables Delay Monitoring on the link.
Pattern
Ping 511 Pattern
The test pattern in the ping packet.
DLCI, Port
16, NET
The DLCI and Port on which the test is to be run.
Port options: NET, DTE, Ethernet, and COMM.
Test Interval
60
Interval size in seconds between transmission of test packets
Packet Size
100
The size of the test packets.
Table D-43Menu-$A Unit Configuration
Primary
Parameter–Options;
Parameter Definition
Default
UNIT
Packet Processing Mode – can be set to Fast Forwarding, Fast Forward Broadcast, or Routing
Routing
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Primary
Parameter–Options;
Parameter Definition
Default
0.0.0.0
Default Gateway IP Address - default IP address
Default Gateway - enable or disable Gateway
Firewall – enable or disable firewall
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Load Balancing – enable or disable Load Balancing
Table D-44Menu-$B Display routing table
Indication
Description
Destination IP/Len
Next Hop IP
Interface
Destination IP or network address/length
Next IP/network address along the route
Interface (Self, ENET, MLPPP, PPP1, PPP2) on which packet will be sent
Indicates type of route (Connect, Static)
Flags
Metric
Distance to next Gateway enroute to destination IP
Table D-45Menu-$C Static routing table parameters
Indication
Status
Description
Shows routes active or inactive
Destination IP/Len
Next Hop IP
Interface
Destination IP or network address
Next IP/network address along route path
Interface (Self, ENET, MLPPP, PPP1, PPP2) on which packet will be sent
Distance to next gateway enroute to destination IP
Add or delete route
Metric
Action
Table D-46Menu-$F Display ARP Table
Address
Definition
IP Address
MAC Address
Address for client or server station (0.0.0.0)
Address for LAN network card
Table D-47Menu-$H Firewall table
Indication
Ord
Definition
Order number in which packet is processed
Permit or Deny - processing of packet is either permitted or denied
Packet source address/length
Action
Src Address/Len
Dest Address/Len
SrcIntf
Packet destination address/length
Packet source interface (ENET, MLPPP, PPP1, PPP2)
134
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Indication
Status
Definition
Status is either Active or Inactive. Press the “k” key (see bottom of screen) to save
the Status to the Firewall Table.
Table D-48Menu-$K DHCP Relay configuration
Parameter
DHCP Relay
DHCP Server
Definition
Enable or disable DHCP relay agent
DHCP Server IP address
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 931 2233
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
136
SALES: 0118 965 5100
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Router Command Line Interface Reference E
ACCESS TO ROUTER COMMAND LINE
The Dual Trunk router command line interface (CLI) is accessible manually via TUI and
programmatically for configuring the router automatically.
For manual configuration and troubleshooting, access the CLI via the TUI Menu-$E directly
through the COMM port, or Telnet via the Ethernet or the WAN ports. You enter the commands one
line at a time using the command syntax outlined in this appendix.
Configuring the router automatically
You can manage your router configurations using configuration files. Retrieve the complete router
configuration onto an ASCII text file and store it on a server for backup. Make changes to the
router configuration file off-line then download it either manually or automatically. The following
table lists the procedures for retrieving and saving, and downloading router configuration files..
Table E-1 Router automatic configuration procedures
Procedure
Steps
Retrieving and saving the router
configuration to a file
To retrieve the router configuration file, you will need to access
the router TUI, display the router configuration on the Terminal
or Telnet session, then cut and paste to an ASCII text file.
1.Select Menu-8X from the TUI
2.Enter B to select the command Display Configuration
3.Enter Y to the prompt “Start Configuration Display (Y/N) ?”
The router will display the complete router configuration
using CLI commands
4.From your Terminal Window or Telnet session, cut and paste
the displayed router configuration to an ASCII text file, then
save the file.
Downloading router configuration
manually
You can download a router configuration file containing either a
complete router configuration or partial changes to the router
configuration.
1.Select Menu-8X from the Terminal User Interface
2.Select the download method TFTP or Xmodem
3.Answer Y to the prompt “Do you really want to change to
router configuration (Y/N) ?
4.From your Workstation, select the router configuration file
and start the TFTP or Xmodem download
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table E-1 Router automatic configuration procedures
Procedure
Steps
Downloading router configuration
automatically
You can initiate the configuration file download
programmatically using SNMP commands, and use TFTP or
Xmodem method to download the file. Menu-8X Router auto
configuration commands and options are accessible via SNMP
variables in the eclipse MIB.
The following shell script sample shows a TFTP download of a
router configuration file called “site_a.txt”:
#!/bin/ksh
NODE="172.25.150.1"
AUTO_FILE="site_a.txt"
snmpset $NODE .1.3.6.1.4.1.300.200.2.50.1.0 integer 1
tftp $NODE <<EOT
bin
put $AUTO_FILE
quit
EOT
snmpget $NODE .1.3.6.1.4.1.300.200.2.50.10
ROUTER COMMAND LINE HELP
The CLI contains a text-based help facility. Access this help by typing in the full or partial command
string then typing “?”. The CLI displays the command keywords or parameters for the command plus a
short description.
For example, at the CLI command prompt, type show? (the CLI does not display the question mark).
The CLI displays this keyword list with short descriptions for each keyword:
debugging Zebra configuration
history
Display the session command history
interface Interface status and configuration
ip
IP information
138
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
memory
Table E-2 Router CLI Help
Description
Memory statistics
Topic
Syntax Help
Use command ? to list commands or use List command to see available commands
for each each mode.
At the CLI command prompt type kernel:
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Ospf/Bpg]#kernel
[Kernel(enable)]# sh ?
Press TAB. The CLI shows:
[Kernel(enable)]# show
Type show i. Press TAB. The CLI shows:
[Kernel(enable)]# show i
interface ip
[Kernel(enable)]# show i
The CLI waits for your choice of the interfaceor ipparameters. Type nand
press TAB. The CLI shows:
[Kernel(config)]# show in
[Kernel(config)]# show interface
Type? and the CLI shows the list of parameters for the show interface
command. This command has one positional parameter, an interface name.
[IFNAME] Interface name
[Kernel(enable)]> show interface
The router waits for you to supply a value for the IFNAME parameter.
Coomand abbreviations
Command line errors
The CLI accepts abbreviations for commands. For example,
sh in
is the abbreviation for the show interface command.
If at any time the router does not recognize the command or parameter (check the
position of a parameter) it displays this message:
% Unknown command.
If a command is incomplete it displays this message:
% Command incomplete.
Some commands are too long for the display line and can wrap in mid-parameter or
mid-keyword if necessary:
area 215.216.217.218 virtual-link 215.216.217.218 authentication-key 57393
Command Negation
In this example from the OSPF area virtual-linkcommand, nois
optional. This means that the entire syntax can be negated. Depending on the
command or the parameters, command negation can mean the disabling of one entire
feature for the router or the disabling of that feature for a specific ID or address.
(no) area AREAADDRESSID virtual-link ROUTERID
(AUTHENTICATE|MSGD|INTERVAL)
In this example negation is for the base command; the negated command does not
take any parameters.
default-metric <1-16777214>
no default-metric
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Table E-2 Router CLI Help
Topic
Description
Parameter expansion
For the area virtual-link command, the AREAADDRESSID
parameter is replaced by either an IP address or a number in the given range:
AREAADDRESSID=A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>
The minimum command then is:
area 1.1.1.1 virtual-link 2.2.2.2
The parameters in the string (AUTHENTICATE|MSGD|INTERVAL)are
optional. Each one of which is replaced by more keywords and values.
CLI Command Modes
The commands available are divided in three categores (Unit, Kernel, and Routing) and arranged in
a hierarchy. Each of the three modes has its own set of commands and its own sub modes of
hierarchy.
The commands available for each routing protocol (RIP and OSPF) are separated into several
modes and arranged in a hierarchy. Enable is the default mode and is the lowest level. Each mode
has its own special commands; in some modes, commands from a lower level are available..
Table E-3 CLI command modes
Mode
Description
Enable
This mode is the base mode from where users can perform basic commands like show, exit,
quit, help, list, enable. This mode also includes some debugging command, the save
commands (for saving and viewing the configuration), show protocol specific information,
and so on.
Enable is the default mode.
Configure
Sometimes referred to as Configure Terminal, this mode serves as a gateway into the Interface
and Router.
Interface
router
This mode makes protocol-specific configuration commands accessible.
Sometimes referred to as configure-router mode, this mode available for the RIP and OSPF
protocols, makes available router and routing commands.
Line
Used for access-class commands. It is available for the OSPF and RIP protocols.
Route-map
Mode used to set route metric, route-length and cost data. It is available for the OSPF and RIP
protocols.
When you enter the CLI, the following prompt is displayed:
Access Router CLI, type
Unit to enter Unit mode
Kernel to enter kernel mode
Rip to enter RIP mode
Ospf to enter OSPF mode
Quit to exit
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]:
140
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
When you enter Unit the prompt will change to: Unit(enable)
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]: unit
Unit(enable)#
When you enter Kernel the prompt will change to: KERNEL(enable)
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]: Kernel
Kernel(enable)#
Enter quit to go back to the top level
Kernel(enable)#quit
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]:
Enter Rip to enter rip command mode
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]: rip
rip(enable)#
Enter bgp to enter BGP command mode
[Unit/Kernel/Rip/Bgp/Ospf]: bgp
bgp(enable)#
NOTE: Standard LRU4240 includes RIP1, RIP2, and OSPF dynamic routing. BGP-4 protocol is available as an optional
dynamic routing protocol.
UNIT COMMAND REFERENCE
Unit mode lets you access the device unit E1, and Ethernet port physical interface settings, Frame
Relay protocol, static routes, firewall, NAT, bridging, multilink, time synchronization, alarms,
COMM port, and management interfaces.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
configure terminal
Use the configure terminal command to change to configure terminal mode.
Command Syntax: configure terminal
Command Mode: Enable
Usage
There are no arguments or keywords for this command. The prompt will change to
Unit(config)#
Example
Unit(enable)#configure terminal
Unit(config)#
quit
Use the quit command to change exit from the current mode and return to the higher level mode.
Command Syntax: quit
Example
Unit(config)#quit
Unit(enable)#
show running-config
Use the show running-config command to show running config.
Command Syntax
show running-config
Command Mode: unit
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Examples
Unit(enable)#show running-config
show running-config
Use the show running-config command to show running config.
Command Syntax
show running-config
Command Mode: rip
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Examples
Rip(enable)#show running-config
43: Current configuration:
44: !
45: !
46: !traffic configuration
47: traffic type ppp
48: multilink no
49: traffic monitoring disabled
50: ip route mode routing
51: !
52: !unit configuration
53: unit protect-mode disabled
54: unit yellow-alarm disabled
55: unit clock primary net1
56: unit clock secondary int
57: unit remote-comm none
58: unit ansi-fdl enabled
59: unit monitor-jack net1
60: !
61: !net configuration
62: t1 framing net1 esf
63: t1 lbo net1 0db
....
show unit id
Use the show unit id command to show the 6 characters local unit identifier.
Command Syntax
show unit id
Command Mode: unit
142
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Examples
Unit(enable)#show unit id
19: unit id SUNN1
e1 framing
Use the e1 framing command to configure the network E1 framing format.
Command Syntax: e1 framing [net1 | net2 | aux] [unstructured | crc-enabled | crc-disabled]
Command Mode: Config
Example
unit(config)#e1 framing net1 unstructured
unit(config)#
e1 line-impedance
Use the e1 line-impedance command to configure the network port line impedance to 75 or 120 ohms. This command is reserved
for BlackBox personnel only, as it requires changing jumper settings on the hardware unit.
Command Syntax: e1 line-impedance [net1 | net2 | aux] [120-ohm | 75-ohm]
[net1 | net2 | aux] select the network port
120-ohm set line impedance to 120 ohm
75-ohm set line impedance to 75 ohm
Command Mode: Config
Example
unit(config)#e1 line-impedance net1 120-ohm
e1 timeslot
Use the e1 timeslot command to allocate an E1 timeslot and assign it to data, voice or idle.
Command Syntax: e1 timeslot <1-31> [aux | f1 | idle]
<1-31> select an E1 timeslot number
aux
f1
idle
Assign selected timeslot to auxiliary dro-and-insert port
Assign selected timeslot to Ethernet data port
Selected timeslot will not be used
Command Mode: Config
Example
Assign timeslot 10 to transport data from Ethernet data port.
unit(config)#e1 timeslot 10 f1
interface IFNAME icmp-redirect
Use the interface IFNAME icmp-redirect command to enable or disable ICMP redirect messages on the named interface
Command Syntax: interface [enet | net1 | net2 | bundle0] icmp-redirect [disabled | enabled]
disabled Do not send ICMP redirect messages on this interface
enabled Send ICMP redirect messages on this interface
Usage
ICMP redirect should be configured on the Ethernet interface only.
Command Mode: Config
interface IFNAME ip-addr
Use the interface IFNAME ip-addr command to set the interface IP address and subnet mask
Command Syntax: interface [enet | net1 | net2 | bundle0 | comm] ip-addr <A.B.C.D>/<Len>
enet Ethernet port
net1 Network port 1
net2 Network port 2
comm COMM port
bundle0 multilink interface, in multilink mode
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
<A.B.C.D> IP address in standard form
<Len>
The subnet mask 1 to 32, the part of the IP address shared by all devices on the network.
Command Mode: Config
interface enet
Use the interface enet command to set ethernet port parameters including mask length, half or full duplex mode, and promiscuous
mode
Command Syntax:
interface enet bcast-mask <1-32>
Set the mask length for Net directed IP broadcast in Fast Forwading mode.
Usage: Use this command in IP Fast Forwarding mode only.
interface enet data-mode [full-duplex | half-duplex]
Set physical data mode to half or full-duplex.
interface enet fwd-multicast [disabled | enabled]
Enable or disable forwarding of multicast packets in IP Fast Forwarding mode.
Usage: This command is applicable in Fast Forwarding mode only.
interface enet promiscuous [disabled | enabled]
To enable or disable promiscuous mode in Bridging mode.
Usage: Use this command in Bridging mode only.
interface enet proxy-arp [disabled | enabled]
To enable or disable proxy-arp in Fast-forwarding mode.
Usage: Use this command in Fast Forwarding mode only.
interface frame-relay dlci
Use the interface frame-relay dlci clear command to enter the DLCI number for a virtual cirtuit idendifier and the network port
on which this DLCI is connected.
Command Syntax: interface frame-relay dlci <16-1023> [net 1 | net2 | bundle0]
<16-1023> dlci range
net1, net2, or bundle 0 Network interface on which the DCLI is connected
Command Mode: Config
Example
Unit(config)#interface frame-relay dlci 20 net1
interface frame-relay lmi
Use the interface frame-relay lmi command to enable or disable LMI and configure LMI parameters.
Command Syntax: interface frame-relay lmi [disabled | enabled | enquiry-rx-timer | enquiry-tx-timer | full-status-count | max-lmi-
errir | type | unit-location]
disabled
enabled
Disable LMI Conditioning
Enable LMI Conditioning
enquiry-rx-timer <5-30> Set the expected interval in 5 seconds increments between expected receive enquiry status
message
enquiry-tx-timer <5-30> Set the interval in 5 seconds increments between the sending of a STATUS ENQUIRY and the
receipt of a response.
full-status-count <5-30> Set the interval in 5 seconds increments between the sending of a STATUS ENQUIRY and the
receipt of a response.
max-lmi-error
<5-30> Set the interval in 5 seconds increments between the sending of a STATUS ENQUIRY and the
receipt of a response.
[CPE | CO]
unit-location
Command Mode: Config
144
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Example
Unit(config)#interface frame-relay dlci 20 net1
interface frame-relay map
Use the interface frame-relay map to map IP subnets to DLCIs.
Command Syntax: interface frame-relay map A.B.C.D/M <16-1023> {net1 | net2 | bundle0]
A.B.C.D/M
<16-1023>
IP network address and subnet mask length
DLCI number to map to
net1, net2 or bundle0 Network interface to map to
Command Mode: Config
Example
Unit(config)#interface frame-relay map 10.10.10.120/5 200 net1
interface frame-relay map clear
Use the interface frame-relay map clear to clear the IP subnets to DLCIs mapping table.
Command Syntax: interface frame-relay map clear
Command Mode: Config
Example
Unit(config)#interface frame-relay map clear
ip bridge static-route
Use the ip bridge static-route to configure the static MAC bridge routes table. Each bridge static route identifies a physical WAN
or LAN port on which to bridge the MAC address.
Command Syntax:
ip bridge static-route X:X:X:X:X [enet | net1 | net2 | bundle0
Use this command in PPP mode:
X:X:X:X:X Host MAC address to bridge
IFNAME the port on which to bridge the MAC address
]
ip bridge static-route X:X:X:X:X [enet | net1 | net2 | bundle0] dlci <16-1023>
Use this command in Frame Relay mode
X:X:X:X:X Host MAC address to bridge
IFNAME the port on which to bridge the host MAC address
dlci <16-1023> Frame Relay DLCI on which to bridge the host MAC address
ip bridge static-route clear
Clear the static MAC brige route table.
ip dhcp-relay
Use the ip dhcp-relay to configure the DHCP relay agent.
Command Syntax:
ip dhcp-relay [enabled | disabled]: Enables or disables DHCP relay agent
ip dhcp-relay server A.B.C.D:
Command Mode: Config
Example
Set the DCHP server IP address
ip firewall
Use the ip firewall to configure the access list filtering packets by denying or permitting access from source hosts to destination
hosts.
Command Syntax:
ip firewall [0-511] [deny | permit] A.B.C.D/M A.B.C.D/M [enet | net1 | net2 | bundle0] [active | inactive]
Enter up to 512 rules denying or permitting access.
ip firewall clear: Clear the firewall
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Command Mode: Config
Example
ip nat
Use the ip nat to enable or disable NAT for each physical interface.
Command Syntax:
ip nat [enabled | disabled]
Global parameter enabling or disabling NATfeature.
ip nat IFNAME [nat | napt | two-way-nat] [enabled | disabled]
To specify and enable the type of nat per interface port.
Command Mode: Config
Examples
Enable nat on NET1 port and disable NAT on Ethernet port and NET2.
Unit(config)#ip nat net1 enabled
Unit(config)#ip nat net2 disabled
Unit(config)#ip nat enet disabled
Unit(config)#ip nat enabled
ip nat global
Use the ip nat global to configure the public IP addresses (Global) used by NAT for the private ip addresses (local-addr).
Command Syntax:
ip nat global A.B.C.D/M IFNAME
A.B.C.D/M: Global registered IP address with subnet mask
IFNAME the interface port [net1 | net2 | bundle0 | enet0] on which the global IP address is used
ip nat global clear:
Clear the NAT global Map table
Command Mode: Config
Example
ip nat local-addr
Use the ip nat local-addr to configure the networks that require NAT translation. Refer to Menu-$C Local address table for more
information.
Command Syntax:
ip nat local-addr A.B.C.D/M IFNAME
A.B.C.D/M: Local IP Network and subnet to translate
IFNAME the interface port [net1 | net2 | bundle0 | enet0] to which the the local IP network is attached.
ip nat local-addr clear: Clear the local address table
Command Mode: Config
Example
ip nat static
Use the ip nat static to configure static NAT one-to-one mapping of global IP address to local IP addresses.Static NAT
corresponds to menu-$JB NAT Static table.
Command Syntax:
ip nat static A.B.C.D A.B.C.D IFNAME
A.B.C.D Local IP address to translate
A.B.C.D Translated IP address
IFNAME the [net1 | net2 | bundle0 | enet0] interface port
ip nat static clear: Clear Static NAT table
Command Mode: Config
ip route
146
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Use the ip route command to set static routes that map destination IP addresses to next hop IP address or interface. Static routes
can be edited, changed, viewed from menu$-JC.
Command Syntax:
ip route A.B.C.D/M IFNAME metric <0-255>
Static route mapping destination IP address to interface port
A.B.C.D/M Static route destination IP address field
IFNAME the [net1 | net2 | bundle0 | enet0] interface port
metric <0-255> Static route metric field in seconds
ip route A.B.C.D/M A.B.C.D metric [0-255]
Static route mapping destination IP address to next hop IP address
A.B.C.D/M Static route destination IP address field
A.B.C.D
metric <0-255> Static route metric field in seconds
Command Mode: Config
Next hop IP address
ip route bridge-route-aging-time
Use the ip route bridge-route-aging-time command to set the bridge route aging time. This command is functional in bridging
packet processing mode only.
Command Syntax:
ip bridge-route-aging-time <10-1000000>
ip route default-gateway
Use the ip default-gateway to specify the default router or next hop where IP datagrams will be forwarded if no routes are found.
In Fast Forwarding mode, packets will be forwarded to the default Gateway on the Ethernet port if no host on the LAN responds.
This command is applicable in bridging, fast forwarding, and routing mode. In routing mode you can also specify a default
gateway by entering a static route with 0.0.0.0/0 as <nexthop>.
Command Syntax:
ip default-gateway [enabled | disabled]
ip default-gateway A.B.C.D: Set default gateway IP address
A.B.C.D
Gateway IP address
Command Mode: Config
Example
ip route load-balancing
Use the ip route load-balancing to load balance traffic between two equal routes on two independent T1/E1 links.
Command Syntax:
ip route load-balancing [ enabled | disabled]
Enable or disable load balancing. You will need to set two routes with equal cost to the same destination network on
different interface (NET1, NET2).
Command Mode: Config
Example
ip route mode
Use the ip route mode to set packet processing mode to routing, bridging, or Fast Forwarding.
Command Syntax:
ip route mode [routing | bridging | fast-forward ]
routing: In this mode packets will be routed to next hop address based on static and dynamic route tables.
bridging: Configures the unit for Bridging or VLAN bridging. This mode is commonly called MAC Bridging as the unit
forwards Ethernet frames.
fast-forward: In this mode the unit forwards IP packets, not the Ethernet frames, over the WAN link.
Command Mode: Config
Example
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
ip route vlan-id
Use the ip route vlan-id to set the unit management VLAN ID. With the default VLAN ID disabled, set to 9999, the unit will
check every VLAN frame for management traffic by matching the destination IP address with the unit IP address, which is the
Ethernet port IP address. By setting a unit VLAN ID, the unit will first match VLAN ID in VLAN frames, then match the
destination IP address with the unit IP address. This limits management traffic to a specific VLAN and reduces the processor load.
Command Syntax:
ip route vlan-id <0-4093>
Set the VLAN ID for management traffic.
Command Mode: Config
Example
ip route vlan-priority
Use the ip route vlan-priority to set the unit VLAN priority field so that it can be managed in VLAN bridging mode.
Management traffic is identified with unit VLAN ID and destination MAC address.
Command Syntax:
ip route vlan-priority <0-7>
Set the VLAN Priority field.
Command Mode: Config
Example
ip static-route clear
Use the ip static-route clear to clear the static routing table.
Command Syntax:
ip static-route clear
Command Mode: Config
multilink
Use the multilink command to enable multilink PPP or multilink Frame Relay and configure the multilink protocol parameters.
Command Syntax:
multilink [yes | no
yes ]
multilink mfr
Use the multilink mfr command to configure multilink Frame Relay protocol parameters.
Command Syntax:
link-ack [1-10]
link-integrity-timer [1-180]
retry-counter [1-5]
multilink mlppp
Use the multilink mlppp command to configure multilink PPP protocol parameters.
Command Syntax:
keep-alive-timeout [1-10]
keep-alive-timer [1-180]
retry-counter [1-5]
t1 framing
Use the t1 framing command to configure the network T1 framing format.
Command Syntax: t1 framing [net1 | net2] [esf | d4]
Command Mode: Config
Example
unit(config)#t1 framing net1 esf
148
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
unit(config)#
t1 lbo
Use the t1 lbo command to to set the Line Build Out (LBO) value to be used for tuning the circuit attenuation between the unit
and the last repeater on the T1 circuit.
Command Syntax: t1 lbo [0dB | -7.5dB | -15 dB]
Command Mode: Config
Example
t1 timeslot
Use the t1 timeslot command to allocate an T1 timeslot and assign it to data, voice or idle.
Command Syntax: t1 timeslot <1-23> [aux | f1 | idle]
<1-31> select an E1 timeslot number
aux
f1
idle
Assign selected timeslot to auxiliary dro-and-insert port
Assign selected timeslot to Ethernet data port
Selected timeslot will not be used
Command Mode: Config
Example
Assign timeslot 10 to transport data from Ethernet data port.
unit(config)#e1 timeslot 10 f1
time-sync
Use the time-sync command to configure the RFC-868 time protocol client.
Command Syntax:
time-sync [enabled | disabled] Enable of disables time synchronization.
time-sync attempt-count [1-30]
time-sync attempt-interval [1-10]
time-sync frequency days [0-99]
time-sync frequency hours [0-23]
time-sync frequency minutes [0-59]
time-sync frequency seconds [0-59]
time sync primary-ip A.B.C.D
time-sync secondary-ip A.B.C.D
time-sync port [enet | net | comm]
time-zone
Use the time-zone command to configure the GMT time zone.
Command Syntax:
time-zone ahead-gmt [yes | no]
time-zone day-light-savings [enabled | disabled]
time-zone day-light-savings diff-minutes [0-59]
time-zone day-light-savings start-month [0-12]
time-zone day-light-savings start-week [0-5]
time-zone offset-gmt minutes [0-59]
time-zone day-light-savings diff-hours [0-12]
time-zone offset-gmt hours [0-12]
traffic monitoring
Use the traffic monitoring command to enable or disable RMON1 and RMON2 traffic monitoring.
Command Syntax:
traffic monitoring [enabled | disabled]
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
traffic type
Use the traffic command to set the WAN protocol to Frame Relay or PPP.
Command Syntax:
traffic type [frame-relay | ppp]
unit alarm
Use the unit alarm command to configure the network alams that will be generated to the NMS.
Command Syntax:
unit alarm inband-lonk-loss [enabled | disabled]
unit alarm interface [net | aux] [carrier-loss | sync-loss | ais-received | yellow-received] [enabled | disabled]
unit alarm interface enet carrier-loss [enabled | disabled]
unit ansi-fdl
Use the unit ansi-fdl command to enable or disable standard remote monitoring ansi-fdl.
Command Syntax:
unit ansi-fdl [enabled | disabled]
unit clock
Use the unit clock command to configure the primary and secondary clock.
Command Syntax:
unit clock primary [net | net1| net2 | aux | internal]
unit clock secondary [net | net1| net2 | aux | internal]
unit comm-port
Use the unit comm-port command to configure the console port and flow control.
mand Syntax:
unit comm-port baud [9600 | 14400 | 19200 | 28800 | 38400]
unit comm-port dcd [enabled | disabled]
unit comm-port parity [none | odd | even]
unit comm-port stop-bits [1 | 2]
unit comm-port word-length [7-8]
unit comm-port xon-xoff [disabled | xoff-until-xon | xoff-unti-any]
unit id
Use the unit id command to set the unit identifier
Command Syntax:
unit id [HOSTNAME]
unit idle-code
Use the unit idle-code command to set the idle code.
Command Syntax:
unit idle-code [0-ff]
unit management
Use the unit management command to configure the dial out management feature.
Command Syntax:
unit management connection [direct | fdl | modem]
unit management connection-timeout-logged-on [unlimited | 1-minute | 10-minutes | 30-minutes]
unit management connection-timeout-not-logged-on [unlimited | 1-minute | 10-minutes | 30-minutes]
unit management dial-out-time [0-255]
unit management phone1 WORD
unit management phone2 WORD
150
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
unit modem
Use the unit monitor-jack command to set the monitor jack to net 1 or net2.
Command Syntax:
unit modem str1 WORD
unit modem str2 WORD
unit outage
Use the unit outage command is reserved to configure outage source event.
unit protect-mode
Use the unit protect-mode command to enable or disable changes from front panel.
Command Syntax:
unit protect-mode [enabled | disabled]
unit radius
Use the unit radius command to configure RADIUS client.
Command Syntax:
unit radius [primary-server | secondary-server] ip A.B.C.D
unit radius [retries | response-time] [1-3]
unit radius group-id WORD
unit radius protocol [yes | no]
unit remote-comm
Use the unit remote-comm command to set the remote communication protocol.
Command Syntax:
unit remote-comm [none | att | ansi]
unit sla
Use the unit sla command to configure Frame Relay SLA parameters.
Command Syntax:
unit sla [enabled | disabled]
unit sla [fdr-ddr-sample-period | delay-period] [1-255]
unit sla [fdr | ddr] threshold WORD
unit sla delay-packet-size [50-1500]
unit snmp
Use the unit snmp command to configure the SNMP community strings and the three Network Management unit.
Command Syntax:
unit snmp community [get } set | trap] LINE
unit snmp trap [1 | 2 | 3] A.B.C.D
unit snmp trap port [1 | 2 |3 ] [comm | net1 | net2 | bundle0 | enet]
unit yellow-alarm
Use the unit yellow-alarm command to enable or disable yellow alarm
Command Syntax:
unit yellow-alarm [enabled | disabled]
wan-port in-service
Use the wan-port command to enable or disable service on the NET1 and NET2 WAN ports.
Command Syntax:
want-port in-service [port1 | port2] [yes | no]
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
KERNEL COMMAND REFERENCE
Kernel mode lets you access all the routing tables and interfaces and the various routing protocols
modes.
interface IFNAME
Use the interface IFNAME command to change to configure terminal mode.
Command Syntax: interface [net1 | net2 | mlppp | e0]
The argument to this command is one of the router interface e0 for ethernet port, net1 for PPP1, net2 for PPP2, or bundle0 for
multilink
Command Mode: Enable
Usage
There are no arguments or keywords for this command. The prompt will change to
Rip(config)#
Example
kernel(enable)#show interface net1
36: Interface net1
37: index 3 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>
kernel(enable)#show int net2
57: Interface net2
58: index 4 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>
59: inet 60.10.2.2/24 pointopoint 60.10.2.1 secondary net2
kernel(enable)#show interface
39: Interface e0
40: index 1 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING>
41: HWaddr: 00:a0:c0:00:37:86
42: inet 172.18.65.10/24 broadcast 255.255.255.255 secondary e0
43: Interface mlppp
44: index 2 metric 1 mtu 1500 <>
45: Interface net1
46: index 3 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>
47: Interface net2
48: index 4 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>
49: inet 60.10.2.2/24 pointopoint 60.10.2.1 secondary net2
quit
Use the quit command to change exit from the current mode and return to the higher level mode.
Command Syntax: quit
Example
Kernel(config)#quit
Kernel(enable)#
debug zebos events
Use the debug zebos events command to specify the set of debug options for zebosd events.
Command Syntax: debug zebos events
no debug zebos events
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Command Mode: Enable
152
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
debug zebos kernel
Use the debug zebos kernel command to specify the debug option-set for the zebos routing manager between the kernel interface
Command Syntax: debug zebos kernel
no debug zebos kernel
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Command Mode: Enable
debug zebos packet
Use the debug zebos packet command to specify the debug option-set for the zebos packet
Command Syntax:
debug zebos packet [recv | send | detail]
no debug zebos packet
recv Specifies the debug option-set for receive packet.
send Specifies the debug option-set for send packet.
detail Sets the debug option set to detailed information.
Command Mode: Enable
Examples:
debug zebra packet
debug zebra packet recv detail
show debugging zebos
Use the show debugging zebos command to display debugging information for the zebos routing manager.
Command Syntax
show debugging zebos
Command Mode: Enable
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Examples
show debugging zebos
show interface IFNAME
Use the show nterface command to display interface configuration and status
Command Syntax: show interface IFNAME
IFNAME specifies the name of the interface for which status and configuration is desired:
net1 for network port 1
net2 for network port 2
bundle0 for multilink bundle 0
e0 for ethernet port
Command Mode: Enable
Example
kernel(enable)#show interface mlppp
142:Interface mlppp
143:index 2 metric 1 mtu 1500 <>
kernel(enable)#show interface net1
145:Interface net1
146:index 3 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>
147:inet 10.1.1.2/24 pointopoint 10.1.1.1 secondary net1
kernel(enable)#show interface net2
149:Interface net2
150:index 4 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,POINTOPOINT,RUNNING>
151:inet 10.1.3.1/24 pointopoint 10.1.3.2 secondary net2
kernel(enable)#show interface e0
156: Interface e0
157:index 1 metric 1 mtu 1500 <UP,BROADCAST,RUNNING>
158:HWaddr: 00:a0:c0:00:4d:3f
show ip route
Use the show ip route command to display the IP routing table for a protocol or from a particular table.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Command Syntax: show ip route
Command Mode: Enable
connected Connected
kernel Kernel
rip
Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
static Static routes
A.B.C.D Network in the IP routing table to display
A.B.C.D/M IP prefix <network>/<length>, e.g., 35.0.0.0/8
Examples
kernel(enable)#show ip route
106:Codes: K - kernel route, C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, > - selected route, * - FIB route
108:
109:C>* 10.1.1.0/24 is directly connected, net1
110:S 10.1.1.0/24 [1/0] is directly connected, net1
111:C>* 10.1.3.0/24 is directly connected, net2
112:S 10.1.3.0/24 [1/0] is directly connected, net2
113:S 10.20.30.0/24 [3/0] is directly connected, net2
114:S> 10.20.30.0/24 [2/0] is directly connected, net1
115:S 70.80.90.0/24 [3/0] is directly connected, net1
116:S> 70.80.90.0/24 [2/0] is directly connected, net2
117:C>* 172.30.65.0/24 is directly connected, e0
118:S 172.30.65.0/24 [1/0] is directly connected, e0
kernel(enable)#show ip route rip
90: Codes: K - kernel route, C - connected, S - static, R - RIP,
91:
> - selected route, * - FIB route 92:
93: R> 60.10.1.0/24 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h
94: R> 60.10.1.2/32 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h
95: R> 60.10.4.0/24 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h
96: R> 60.10.4.2/32 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h
97: R> 60.10.5.0/24 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h
98: R> 172.18.0.0/16 [120/2] via 60.10.2.1, net2, 08w5d11h
show running-config
Use the show running-config command to show running config.
Command Syntax
show running-config
Command Mode: enable
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Examples
kernel(enable)#show running-config
76:
77: Current configuration:
78: !
79: hostname router
80: password zebos
81: enable password zebos
82: !
83: interface e0
84: shutdown
85: !
86: interface mlppp
87: shutdown
88: !
89: interface net1
90: shutdown
91: !
92: interface net2
93: !
94: ip route 33.33.0.0/16 net2 0
95: ip route 44.44.0.0/16 net2 0
96: !
97: line vty
98: no login
99: !
100: end
154
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
RIP COMMAND REFERENCE
configure terminal
Use the configure terminal command to change to configure terminal mode.
Command Syntax: configure terminal
Command Mode: Enable
Usage
There are no arguments or keywords for this command. The prompt will change to
Rip(config)#
Example
Rip(enable)#configure terminal
Rip(config)#
router rip
Use the router rip command to change to configure router mode.
Command Syntax
router rip
Usage
There are no arguments or keywords for this command. The prompt will change to
Rip(router rip)#
Example
Rip(config)#router rip
Rip(rip)#
interface IFNAME
Use the interface IFNAME command to change from configure terminal mode to configure interface mode.
Command Syntax: interface net1 | net2 | mlppp | e0
Command Mode:: Config
Usage
The argument to this command is one of the router interface e0 for ethernet port, net1 for PPP1, net2 for PPP2, or mlppp for
MLPPP
Example
Rip(config)#interface net1
Rip(net1)#
quit
Use the quit command to change exit from the current mode and return to the higher level mode.
Command Syntax: quit
Example
Rip(config)#quit
Rip(enable)#
debug rip
Use the debug rip command to specify the options for the displayed debugging information for RIP events. Use the no parameter
to disable all debugging.
Command Syntax
debug rip (events|zebos|packet)
events - RIP events debug information is displayed.
zebos - RIP and ZebOS communication is displayed
packet - packet (recv|send (detail)) Specifies RIP packets only
debug rip packet
recv- specifies that information for received packets be displayed.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
send- specifies that information for sent packets be displayed.
no debug rip (events | packet | zebos)
Command Mode:: Enable
Examples
RIP(enable)#debug rip events
7: RECV packet from 60.10.2.1 port 520 on net2
8: update timer fire!
9: SEND UPDATE to net2 ifindex 4
10: unicast announce to 60.10.2.1 on net2
11: update routes to neighbor 60.10.2.1
12: SEND to socket 34 port 520 addr 60.10.2.
distance
Use the distance command to set the administrative distance.
Use the no form of the command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
(no) distance DISTANCE (A.B.C.D/M (ACCESSLIST))
DISTANCE=<1-255>Specifies the administrative distance value.
A.B.C.D(/M)Specifies the network prefix and length.
ACCESSLISTSpecifies the access-list name.
Command Mode:: Router Configuration
Examples
distance 8 10.0.0.0/8 mylist
no distance 9
ip rip receive-packet
Use the ip rip receive packet command to configure the interface to enable the reception of RIP packets. This feature allows the
user to control the receiving of packets directly on the specified interface. Therefore, the packet receiving is more efficient and
controllable.
Command Syntax
ip rip receive-packet
no ip rip receive-packet
Command Mode:: interface
Examples
ip rip receive-packet
ip rip receive version
Use the ip rip receive version command to receive specified version of RIP packets on an interface basis using version control,
and override the setting of the version command.
Use the no form of this command to use the setting established by the version command.
Command Syntax
ip rip receive version 1|2|[1 2]
no ip rip receive version (1|2|[1 2])
1- specifies acceptance of RIP version 1 packets on the interface.
2- specifies acceptance of RIP version 2 packets on the interface.
1 2- specifies acceptance of RIP version 1 and version 2 packets on the interface.
Command Mode: Router Configuration
Examples
ip rip receive version 1 2
Related Commands
version
ip rip send-packet
156
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Use the ip rip send packet command to configure the interface to enable the sending of RIP packets. This feature allows the user
to control the sending of packets directly on the specified interface. Therefore, the packet sending is more efficient and
controllable.
Command Syntax
ip rip send-packet
no ip rip send-packet
Command Mode: interface
Examples
ip rip send-packet
ip rip send version
Use the ip rip send version command to send RIP packets on an interface using version control.
Use the no option on this command to use the global RIP version control rules.
Command Syntax
ip rip send version 1|2|[1 2]
no ip rip send version (1|2)
1 - specifies sending of RIP version 1 packets out of an interface.
2 - specifies sending of RIP version 2 packets out of an interface.
1 2- permits sending of both RIP version 1and 2 packets out of an interface.
Command Mode: Router Configuration
Examples
ip rip send version 1
ip rip send version 1-compatible
Use the ip rip send version 1-compatible command to send RIP version 1 compatible packets from a version 2 RIP interface to
other RIP interfaces. This mechanism causes version 2 RIP to broadcast the packets instead of multicasting them.
Use the no option on this command to use the global RIP version control rules.
Command Syntax
ip rip send version 1-compatible
Command Mode: Router Configuration
Examples
ip rip send version 1-compatible
Usage Notes
For testing this case, the configuration must be:!
interface XXXX
ip rip send version 1-compatible
!
router rip
version 2
NOTE: The default version for ripd is version 2. Use the versioncommand to explicitly specify a different version.
ip split-horizon
Use the ip split-horizon command to perform the split-horizon action on the interface. The default is split-horizon
poisoned.
Use the no option on this command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
ip split-horizon (poisoned)
poisonedperform split-horizon with poisoned reverse.
no ip split-horizon
Command Mode: Router Configuration
Examples
ip split-horizon
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
neighbor
Use the neighbor command to specify a neighbor router. It is used for each connected point-to-point link. Use the no parameter to
disable the specific router.
Command Syntax
(no) neighbor A.B.C.D
A.B.C.Dis an IP address of a neighboring router with which the routing information will be exchanged.
Command Mode: configuration mode
Examples
neighbor 1.1.1.
network
Use the network command to specify a network as one that runs Routing Information Protocol (RIP). Use the no parameter to
remove the specified network as one that runs RIP.
Command Syntax
(no) network [A.B.C.D(/M)]|IFNAME
A.B.C.D(/M)- specifies the IP address prefix and length of this IP network.
IFNAME- alphanumeric string specifies the interface name.
Command Mode: Router Configuration
Examples
network 10.0.0.0/8
network eth0
passive-interface
Use the passive-interface command to enable suppression of routing updates on an interface.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function
Command Syntax
(no) passive-interface IFNAME
IFNAME- specifies the interface name.
Command Mode: Router Configuration
Examples
passive-interface eth0
route
Use the route command to configure static RIP routes.
Use the no form of the command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
(no) route A.B.C.D/M
A.B.C.D(/M)- specifies the IP address prefix and length
Command Mode: Router Configuration
Examples
route 1.2.3.4/8
Usage
router rip
...
version 1
network 10.10.10.0/24
network 10.10.11.0/24
neighbor 10.10.10.10...
ripd(config-router)# route 10.10.10.0/24...
version 1
network 10.10.10.0/24
network 10.10.11.0/24
route 10.10.10.0/24
158
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
router rip
Use the router rip global command to enable a RIP routing process.
Use the no form of the command to disable the RIP routing process.
(no) router rip
Command Syntax
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Command Mode: Router Configuration
Examples
router rip
Usage Notes
router rip
version 1
network 10.10.10.0/24
network 10.10.11.0/24
neighbor 10.10.10.10
show debugging rip
Use the show debugging rip command to display the RIP debugging status for these debugging options:
zebos debugging, RIP event debugging, RIP packet debugging and RIP zebos debugging.
Command Syntax
show debugging rip
Command Mode: Enable
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Examples
show debugging rip
show ip protocols
Use the show ip protocols command to display RIP process parameters and statistics.
Command Syntax
show ip protocols
Command Mode: Enable
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Examples
show ip protocols
RIP(enable)#show ip protocols
116: Routing Protocol is "rip"
117: Sending updates every 30 seconds with +/-50%, next due in 14 seconds
118: Timeout after 180 seconds, garbage collect after 120 seconds
119: Outgoing update filter list for all interface is not set
120: Incoming update filter list for all interface is not set
121: Default redistribution metric is 1
122: Redistributing: connected
123: Default version control: send version 2, receive version 2
124:
125:
Interface
net2
Send Recv Key-chain
2
2
126: Routing for Networks:
127:
128:
net1
net2
129: Routing Information Sources:
130:
131:
Gateway
60.10.2.1
BadPackets BadRoutes Distance Last Update
120 00:15:22
0
0
132: Distance: (default is 120)
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
show running-config
Use the show running-config command to show running config.
Command Syntax
show running-config
Command Mode: rip
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Examples
Rip(enable)#show running-config
2:
3: Current configuration:
4: !
5: hostname router
6: password zebos
7: enable password zebos
8: !
9: interface e0
10: !
11: interface mlppp
12: !
13: interface net1
14: !
15: interface net2
16: !
17: router rip
18: redistribute connected
19: network net1
20: network net2
21: !
22: line vty
23: no login
24: !
25: end
Rip(enable)#
show ip rip
Use the show ip rip command to show RIP routes.
Command Syntax
show ip rip
Command Mode: Enable
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Examples
show ip rip
RIP(enable)#show ip rip
104: Codes: R - RIP, C - connected, O - OSPF, B - BGP
105:
106: Network
Next Hop
60.10.2.1
60.10.2.1
Metric From
2 60.10.2.1
2 60.10.2.1
1
2 60.10.2.1
2 60.10.2.1
2 60.10.2.1
2 60.10.2.1
1
Time
42:45
42:45
107: R 60.10.1.0/24
108: R 60.10.1.2/32
109: C 60.10.2.0/24
110: R 60.10.4.0/24
111: R 60.10.4.2/32
112: R 60.10.5.0/24
113: R 172.18.0.0/16
114: C 172.18.65.0/24
60.10.2.1
60.10.2.1
60.10.2.1
60.10.2.1
42:45
42:45
42:45
42:45
timers
Use the timers command to adjust routing network timers.
Use the no form of the command to restore the defaults.
Command Syntax
timers basic TABLETIMER INFORMATIONTIMER GARBAGETIMER
no timers basic
TABLETIMER=<0-4294967295>Specifies the routing table update timer in seconds. The default is 30 seconds.
INFORMATIONTIMER=<0-4294967295>Specifies the routing information timeout timer in seconds. The default is
180 seconds. After this interval has elapsed and no updates for a route are received, the route is declared invalid.
160
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
GARBAGETIMER=<0-4294967295>Specifies the routing garbage collection timer in seconds. The default is 120
seconds.
Command Mode: Router Configuration
Examples
timers 30 180 120
version
Use the version command to set a RIP routing protocol version.
Use the no form of the command to restore the default.
Command Syntax
version <1-2>
no version <1-2>
<1-2>- specifies the version of RIP processing. Default is RIP v2.
Command Mode: Router Configuration
Examples
version 1
Usage
ripd# sh run...
router rip
network 10.10.10.0/24
network 10.10.11.0/24
ripd(config-router)# version 1
router rip...
version 1
network 10.10.10.0/24
network 10.10.11.0/24
OSPF COMMAND REFERENCE
area authentication
Use the area authentication command to enable authentication for an OSPF area. Use the no parameter to remove the
authentication specification for an area.
Command Syntax
area AREAID authentication
no area AREAID authentication
AREAID= A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 specification of the area for which to enable authentication.
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number of the area for which to enable authentication.
Default
Type 0 authentication or no authentication.
Command Mode: Router mode
Usage
Specifying the area authentication sets the authentication to Type 1 authentication or the Simple Password authentication (details
in RFC 2328). Setting up a Type 1 authentication configures a 64-bit field for that particular network. All packets sent on this
network must have this configured value in their OSPF header. This allows only routers that have the same passwords to join the
routing domain. Give all routers that are to communicate with each other through OSPF the same authentication password.
Use the ip ospf authentication-key command to specify an OSPF authentication password.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# area 1 authentication
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Related Commands
area default-cost, area stub, ip ospf authentication-key
area default-cost
Use the area default-cost command to specify a cost for the default summary route sent into a stub.
Use the no form of this command to remove the assigned default-route cost.
Command Syntax
area AREAID default-cost <0-16777215>
no area AREAID default-cost
AREAID=A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 specification of the address for the stub.
AREAADDRESSID= The area identification number for the stub.
default-cost Indicates the cost for the default summary route used for a stub. Default value of cost is 1.
Command Mode: Router mode
Usage
Area command has two configuration options, stub and default-cost. The default-cost option provides the metric for the summary
default route, generated by the area border router, into the stub area. Use this option only on an area border router that is attached
to the stub area. Refer to RFC 1587 for information on stub area.
Examples
This example sets the default-cost to 10 for area 1.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# area 1 default-cost 10
Related Commands
area authentication, area stub
area export-list
Use the area export-list command to define restrictions on routes that are advertised from a specified area.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
area AREAID export-list NAME
no area AREAID export-list
AREAID=A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 specification of the address for the stub.
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number for the stub.
NAME The name of the configured access list.
Command Mode: Router mode
Usage
Use the export-list in combination with the access list to specify the routes that will be advertised to other areas.This command is
applied only when generating summary-LSAs (type 3).
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# access-list list1 deny 172.22.0.0/8
ospfd(config-router)# area 1 export-list list1
Related Commands
access list
area import-list
Use the area import-list command to import summary routes from a stub.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
area AREAID import-list NAME
no area AREAID import-list
162
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
AREAID=A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 specification of the address for the stub.
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number for the stub.
NAME The name of the configured access list.
Command Mode: Router mode
Usage
In conjunction with IP access list, this command is used to configure routes outside the area that will be advertised into this area.
This command is only applied when generating summary LSAs (type 3).
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# access-list list1 deny 172.22.0.0/8
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)#area 1 import-list list1
Related Commands
access list
area range
Use the area range command to summarize OSPF routes at an area boundary.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
area AREAID range ADDRESS (advertise|not-advertise|SUBSTITUTE)
no area AREAID range
AREAID= A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 address specification of the address for the stub.
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number for the stub.
ADDRESS= A.B.C.D/M The area range prefix and length.
advertise Advertises this range.
not-advertise Does not advertise this range.
SUBSTITUTE = substitute A.B.C.D/M Announce area range as another prefix.
A.B.C.D/M = Network prefix to be announced instead of range.
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
The area range command is used to summarize intra-area routes for an area. The single summary route is then advertised to other
areas by the Area Border Routers (ABRs). Routing information is condensed at area boundaries and outside the area. If the
network numbers in an area are assigned in a way such that they are contiguous, the ABRs can be configured to advertise a
summary route that covers all the individual networks within the area that fall into the specified range.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# area 1 range 192.16.0.0/24
Related Commands
area shortcut
Use the area shortcut command to configure the short-cutting mode of an area.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
area AREAID shortcut (default|enable|disable)
no area AREAID shortcut (enable|disable)
AREAID= A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 address specification of the address for the stub.
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number for the stub.
default Sets default short-cutting behavior.
enable Forces short-cutting through the area.
disable Disables short-cutting through the area.
Default
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
Examples
area 1 shortcut default
area 52 shortcut disable
no area 42 shortcut enable
Related Commands
ospf abr-type shortcut
area stub
Use the area stub command to define an area as a stub area.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
(no) area AREAID stub (no-summary)
AREAID= A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>
A.B.C.D= The IPv4 address specification of the identifier for the stub.
<0-4294967295>= The area identification number for the stub.
no-summary Stops an ABR from sending summary link advertisements into the stub area.
Default
No stub area is defined.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
Configures the area stub command on all routers in the stub area. There are two stub area router configuration commands: the stub
and default-cost commands. In all routers attached to the stub area, configure the area by using the stub option of the area
command. For an area border router (ABR) attached to the stub area, use the areadefault-cost command.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# area 1 stub
Related Commands
area authentication, area default-cost
area virtual-link
Use the area virtual-link command to configure a link between a non-backbone area that cannot be physically connected to the
backbone area, through another non-backbone area. Use the no form of this command to remove a virtual link.
Command Syntax
(no) area AREAID virtual-link A.B.C.D (AUTHENTICATION|AUTHKEY|INTERVAL)
AREAID=A.B.C.D|<0-4294967295>
A.B.C.D= OSPF area ID in IP address format.
<0-4294967295>= range of the number of the OSPF area to be linked.
A.B.C.D = The IP address associated with a virtual link neighbor.
AUTHENTICATION = authentication (|null|AUTHKEY)
authentication= Enable authentication on this virtual link
null = Use null authentication to override password or message digest.
AUTHKEY = authentication-key KEY
KEY = An 8 character password
164
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
INTERVAL=dead-interval|hello-interval|retransmit-interval|transmit-delay VALUE
VALUE = <1-65535> The number of seconds in the delay or interval.
hello-interval= The interval the router waits before it sends a hello packet. The default is ten seconds.
retransmit-interval= The interval the router waits before it retransmits a packet. The default is five
seconds.
transmit-delay= The interval the router waits before it transmits a packet.The default value is one
second.
dead-interval= The interval during which no packets are received and after which the router considers
a neighboring router as off-line. The default is 40 seconds.
Command Mode
Router mode.
Usage
In OSPF, all non-backbone areas must be connected to a backbone area. If the connection to the backbone is lost, the virtual link
repairs the connection.
You can configure virtual links between any two backbone routers that have an interface to a common non-backbone area. The
protocol treats these two routers joined by a virtual link as if they were connected by an unnumbered point-to-point network.To
configure virtual link, include both the transit area ID and the corresponding virtual link neighbor's router ID in the virtual link
neighbor. To see the router ID use the show ip ospf command.
Configure the Hello-interval to be the same for all routers attached to a common network. If the hello-interval is short, the router
detects topological changes faster, but more routing traffic follows. Retransmit-interval is the expected round-trip delay between
any two routers in a network. Set the value to be greater than the expected round-trip delay to avoid needless retransmissions.
Transmit-delay is the time taken to transmit a link state update packet on the interface.Before transmission, the link state
advertisements in the update packet, are incremented by this amount. Set the transmit-delay to be greater than zero. Also, take into
account the transmission and propagation delays for the interface.
Include the transit area ID and the corresponding virtual link neighbor's router ID in each virtual link neighbor to properly
configure a virtual link.
Examples (note some examples show abbreviated parameters)
area 123.123.123.1 virtual-link 123.123.123.2
area 123.123.123.1 virtual-link 123.123.123.2 authentication
area 1 virtual-link 123.123.123.2 authentication null
area 1 virtual-link 1.1.1.1 hel 1 ret 2 tran 3 dead 4
Related Commands
area authentication, service password-encryption, show ip ospf
auto-cost
Use the auto-cost command to control how OSPF calculates default metrics for the interface.
Use the no form of this command to assign cost, based only on the interface type.
Command Syntax
auto-cost reference-bandwidth <1-4294967>
no auto-cost reference-bandwidth
<1-4294967> The reference bandwidth in terms of Mbits per second. The default reference bandwidth is 100 Mbps.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
By default OSPF calculates the OSPF metric for an interface by dividing the reference bandwidth by the interface bandwidth. The
default value for the reference bandwidth is 100Mbps. The auto-cost command is used to differentiate high bandwidth links. For
multiple links with high bandwidth, specify a larger reference bandwidth value to differentiate cost on those links.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# auto-cost reference-bandwidth 50
Related Commands
ip ospf cost
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
compatible rfc1583
Use the compatible rfc1583 command to restore the method used to calculate summary route costs per RFC.
Use the no form of this command to disable RFC 1583 compatibility.
Command Syntax
(no) compatible rfc1583
Default
By default, OSPF is rfc 2328 compatible.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
Prior to RFC 2328, OSPF was compliant with RFC 1583, that specified method for calculating the metric for summary routes
based on the minimum metric of the component paths available. RFC 2328 specifies a method for calculating metrics based on
maximum cost. With this change, it is possible that all of the ABRs in an area might not be upgraded to the new code at the same
time. Compatible rfc1583 command addresses this issue and allows the selective disabling of compatibility with RFC 2328.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# compatible rfc1583
Related Commands
debug ospf event
Use the debug ospf event command to specify debugging options for OSPF event troubleshooting. Use this command without
parameters to turn on all the options.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
(no) debug ospf event (abr|asbr|lsa|os|router|vl)
abr shows ABR events
asbr shows ASBR events
lsa shows LSA events
os shows OS interaction events
router shows other router events
vl shows virtual link events
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode and Configure mode
Usage
Examples
ospfd# no debug ospf event abr
ospfd# debug ospf event asbr
ospfd# debug ospf event lsa
ospfd# debug ospf event os
ospfd# debug ospf event router
ospfd# debug ospf event vl
Related Commands
terminal monitor, log file
debug ospf ism
Use the debug ospf ism command to specify debugging options for OSPF Interface State Machine (ISM)
troubleshooting.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
(no) debug ospf ism (status|events|timers)
events Displays ISM event information
status Displays ISM status information
166
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
timers Displays ISM timer information
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode and Configure mode
Usage
Examples
ospfd# no debug ospf ism events
ospfd# debug ospf ism status
ospfd# debug ospf ism timers
Related Commands
terminal monitor, log file
debug ospf lsa
Use the debug ospf lsa command to specify debugging options for OSPF Link State Advertisements (LSA)
troubleshooting.
Use the no form of this option to disable this function.
Command Syntax
(no) debug ospf lsa (generate|flooding|install|maxagerefresh)
generate Displays LSA generation.
flooding Displays LSA flooding.
install Show LSA installation.
maxage Shows maximum age of the LSA in seconds.
refresh Displays LSA refresh.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode and Configure mode
Usage
Each LSA has an Age field which is incremented every second. LSAs are discarded when the LS Age reaches 3600 i.e.if
MaxAge is 3600 seconds (an hour).
Examples
ospfd# no debug ospf lsa refresh
ospfd# debug ospf lsa flooding
ospfd# debug ospf lsa install
ospfd# debug ospf lsa maxage
ospfd# debug ospf lsa generate
Related Commands
terminal monitor, log file
debug ospf nsm
Use the debug ospf nsm command to specify debugging options for OSPF Neighbor State Machines (NSMs).
Use the no option to disable this function.
Command Syntax
(no) debug ospf nsm (status|events|timers)
status Displays NSM status information.
events Displays NSM event information.
timers Displays NSM timer information.
Default
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode Configure mode
Usage
Examples
ospfd# debug ospf nsm events
ospfd# no debug ospf nsm timers
Related Commands
terminal monitor, log file
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
debug ospf packet
Use the debug ospf packet command to specify debugging options for OSPF packets.
Command Syntax
(no) debug ospf packet PARAMETERS (send|recv) (detail)
PARAMETERS = all|dd|hello|ls-request|ls-update|ls-ack
all Specifies debugging for all OSPF packets.
dd Specifies debugging for OSPF database descriptions.
hello Specifies debugging for OSPF hello packets.
ls-ack Specifies debugging for OSPF link state acknowledgments.
ls-request Specifies debugging for OSPF link state requests.
ls-update Specifies debugging for OSPF link state updates.
send Specifies the debug option set for sent packets.
recv Specifies the debug option set for received packets.
detail Sets the debug option set to detailed information.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode and Configure mode
Usage
Examples
ospfd# debug ospf packet all detail
ospfd# debug ospf packet dd send detail
ospfd# no debug ospf packet ls-request recv detail
Related Commands
terminal monitor, log file
debug ospf route
Use the debug ospf route command to specify which route calculation to debug. Use this command without
parameters to turn on all the options.
Command Syntax
(no) debug ospf route (ase|ia|install|spf)
ia specifies the debugging of Inter-Area route calculation
ase specifies the debugging of external route calculation
install specifies the debugging of route installation
spf specifies the debugging of SPF calculation
Command Mode
Priviledge Exec mode Configure mode
Usage
Examples
ospfd# debug ospf route
ospfd# no debug ospf route ia
ospfd# debug ospf route install
Related Commands
debug ospf zebos
Use the debug ospf zebos command to specify debugging options for OSPF ZebOS information.
Command Syntax
(no) debug ospf zebos (interface|redistribute)
interface Specifies the zebos interface.
redistribute Specifies zebos redistribute.
Command Mode
Privileged EXEC mode and Configure mode
Usage
Examples
ospfd# debug ospf zebos interface
168
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
ospfd# no debug ospf zebos redistribute
Related Commands
terminal monitor, log file
default-information originate
Use the default-information originate command to create a default external route into an OSPF routing domain.
Use the no form of this command to disable this feature.
Command Syntax
default-information originate (ALWAYS|METRIC|ROUTE)
no default-information originate
ALWAYS = always (METRIC|ROUTE) Used to advertise the default route regardless of whether the
software has a default route.
METRIC = [METRIC METRIC-TYPE]|[METRIC-TYPE METRIC]
METRIC= metric <1-16777214> (ROUTE)
metric Sets the OSPF metric used in creating the default route. The default metric value is 10. The
value used is specific to the protocol.
METRIC-TYPE= metric-type 1|2 (ROUTE)
metric-type Sets the OSPF external link type for default routes.
1 Sets OSPF External Type 1 metrics.
2 Sets OSPF External Type 2 metrics.
ROUTE= route-map WORD
WORD= Specifies the name of route-map.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
The system acts like an Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR) when you use the default-informationoriginate command
to redistribute routes into an OSPF routing domain. An ASBR does not by default, generate a default route into the OSPF routing
domain.
When you use the default-information originate command, also specify the route-map map-name option to avoid a dependency on
the default network in the routing table.
The metric-type is an external link type associated with the default route advertised into the OSPF routing domain. The value of
the external route could be either Type 1 or 2; the default is the Type 2.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# default-information originate always metric 23 metric-type
2 route-map myinfo
Related Commands
default-metric
Use the default-metric command to set default metric values for the OSPF routing protocol.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default state.
Command Syntax
default-metric <1-16777214>
no default-metric
<1-16777214> Default metric value appropriate for the specified routing protocol.
Default
Built-in, automatic metric translations, as appropriate for each routing protocol.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
A default metric facilitates redistributing routes even with incompatible metrics. If the metrics do not convert, the default metric
provides an alternative and enables the redistribution to continue. Default-metric command is used to cause the current routing
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
protocol to use the same metric value for all redistributed routes. Use this command in conjunction with the redistribute command.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# default-metric 100
Related commands
redistribute
description
Use the description command to add a description to an interface.
Use the no form of this command to remove the description.
Command Syntax
description LINE
no description
LINE 1-1023 characters that are a description of the ZebOS interface.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface eth0
ospfd(config-if)# description This interface is ethernet interface
Related Commands
distance
Use the distance command to define OSPF route administrative distances based on route type.
Use the no form of this command to restore the default value.
Command Syntax
distance <1-255>|ROUTEPARAMETER
no distance ospf
<1-255> = OSPF administrative distance.
ROUTEPARAMETER= ospf ROUTE1|ROUTE2|ROUTE3 DISTANCE
ROUTE1= external Sets the distance for routes from other routing domains, learned by redistribution.
ROUTE2= inter-area Sets the distance for all routes from one area to another area.
ROUTE3= intra-area Sets the distance for all routes within an area.
DISTANCE= <1-255> Distance for external, intra-area, or inter-area routes.
Note: Include ROUTE1, ROUTE2 and ROUTE3 parameters one time each in a single command in any order.
Default
The default distance for each type of route (intra, inter or external) is 110.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
The administrative distance rates the trustworthiness of a routing information source. The distance could be any integer from 0 to
255. A higher distance value indicates a lower trust rating. For example, an administrative distance of 255 indicates that the
routing information source cannot be trusted and should be ignored.
Use this command to set the distance for an entire group of routes, rather than a specific route that passes an access list.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# distance ospf inter-area 20 intra-area 10 external 40
Related Commands
distribute-list
170
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Use the distribute-list command to filter networks in routing updates.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function
Command Syntax
distribute-list LISTNAME out ROUTE
no distribute-list LISTNAME
LISTNAME Specifies the name of the access list.
out Indicates that outgoing advertised routes will be cleared.
ROUTE= kernel | connected | static | rip | ospf | bgp
kernel Specifies kernel routes.
connected Specifies connected routes.
static Specifies static routes.
rip Specifies RIP routes.
ospf Specifies OSPF routes.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
Use this command when redistributing other routing protocols into the OSPF routing table.
Examples
The following example shows the distribution of BGP routing updates based on the access list list1 (network 172.10.0.0).
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# access-list list1 permit 172.10.0.0 0.0.255.255
ospfd(config)#router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# distribute-list list1 out bgp
ospfd(config-router)# redistribute bgp
Related Commands
ip ospf authentication
Use the ip ospf authentication command to send and receive OSPF packets with the specified authentication
method.
Use the no form of this command to disable the authentication.
Command Syntax
ip ospf authentication (A.B.C.D|MESSAGE|NULL)
no ip ospf authentication
A.B.C.D = The IP address of the interface.
NULL = null (A.B.C.D) Use no authentication; it overrides password
authentication of the interface.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
Examples
ip ospf authentication null
Related Commands
ip ospf authentication-key
ip ospf authentication-key
Use the ip ospf authentication-key command to specify an OSPF authentication password for the neighboring routers.
Use the no form of this command to remove an OSPF authentication password.
Command Syntax
ip ospf authentication-key AUTHKEY (A.B.C.D)
no ip ospf authentication-key (A.B.C.D)
AUTHKEY = Specifies the authentication password. Any continuous string of characters (not more than 8 bytes)
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface
Default
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Authentication password not specified.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
This command creates a password (key) that is inserted into the OSPF header when ZebOS software originates routing protocol
packets. Assign a separate password to each network for different interfaces. All neighboring routers on the same network with the
same password exchange OSPF routing data.
The key can be used only when authentication is enabled for an area. Use the area authentication command to enable
authentication.
Simple password authentication allows a password to be configured for each area. Configure the routers in the same routing
domain with the same password.
Examples
ip ospf authentication-key 123
Equivalent Commands
ospf authentication-key, area authentication
ip ospf cost
Use the ip ospf cost command to explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interface.
Use the no form of this command to reset the path cost to the default value.
Command Syntax
ip ospf cost COST (A.B.C.D)
no ip ospf cost (A.B.C.D)
COST = <1-65535> Specifies the link-state metric.The default value is 10.
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
The interface cost indicates the overhead required to send packets across a certain interface. It is inversely proportional to the
bandwidth of that interface. By default, the cost of an interface is calculated based on the bandwidth (108/ bandwidth);
use this ip ospf cost command to set the cost manually.
Examples
The following example shows setting ospf cost as 10 on interface fxp0 for IP address 10.10.10.50
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf cost 10 10.10.10.50ip ospf cost 123
Related Commands
show ip ospf interface
Equivalent Commands
ospf cost
ip ospf database-filter
This command turns on the LSA database-filter for a particular interface. Use the no parameter to turn off the filter.
Command Syntax
ip ospf database-filter ALL OUT (A.B.C.D)
no ip ospf database-filter (A.B.C.D)
ALL = Filter all LSAs
OUT = Outgoing LSAs
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.
Default
Disabled, all outgoing LSAs are flooded to the interface.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
172
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
OSPF floods new LSAs over all interfaces in an area, except the interface on which the LSA arrives. This redundancy
ensures robust flooding. However, too much redundancy can waste bandwidth and might lead to excessive link and CPU
usage in certain topologies, resulting in destabilizing the network. To avoid this, use the database-filter command to block
flooding of LSAs over specified interfaces.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface eth0
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf database-filter all out
Related Commands
ip ospf dead-interval
Use the ip ospf dead-interval command to set the interval during which no hello packets are received and after
which a neighbor is declared dead.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default time.
Command Syntax
ip ospf dead-interval INTERVAL (A.B.C.D)
no ip ospf dead-interval (A.B.C.D)
INTERVAL= <1-65535> Specifies the interval in seconds. The default interval is 40 seconds.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
The dead-interval is the amount of time that the router waits to receive an OSPF hello packet from the neighbor before declaring
the neighbor down. This value is advertised in the router's hello packets. It must be a multiple of hello-interval and be the same
for all routers on a specific network.
Examples
The following example shows configuring dead-interval for 10 seconds on fxp0 interface for IP address 10.10.10.50.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf dead-interval 10 10.10.10.50
Related Commands
ip ospf hello-interval, show ip ospf interface
Equivalent Commands
ospf dead-interval
ip ospf hello-interval
Use the ip ospf hello-interval command to specify the interval between hello packets.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default time.
Command Syntax
ip ospf hello-interval INTERVAL (A.B.C.D)
no ip ospf hello-interval (A.B.C.D)
INTERVAL= <1-65535> Specifies the interval in seconds. The default interval is 10 seconds.
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
The hello-interval is advertised in the hello packets. Configure the same hello-interval for all routers on a specific network.
A shorter hello interval ensures faster detection of topological changes but results in more routing traffic.
Examples
The following example shows setting the hello-interval for 3 seconds on interface fxp0 for IP address 10.10.10.50.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf hello-interval 3 10.10.10.50
Related Commands
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
ip ospf dead-interval, show ip ospf interface
Equivalent Commands
ospf hello-interval
ip ospf network
Use the ip ospf network command to configure the OSPF network type to a type different from the default for the media.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.
Command Syntax
ip ospf network broadcast|non-broadcast|point-to-point|point-to-multipoint
no ip ospf network
broadcast Sets the network type to broadcast.
non-broadcast Sets the network type to NBMA.
point-to-multipoint Sets the network type to point-to-multipoint.
point-to-point Sets the network type to point-to-point.
Default
Broadcast type.
Command Mode
interface mode
Usage
Use the ip ospf network command to configure Broadcast Networks as Nonbroadcast Multiaccess Networks (NBMA) and vice
versa. You would need to do this if you have routers in your network that do not support multicast addressing.
This command saves you from having to configure neighbors. Configuring NBMA networks requires a fully meshed network or a
virtual circuit connecting every router. In case the network is not fully meshed, configure the OSPF network type as a point-to-
multipoint network. Routing between two routers that are not directly connected will go through a third router that has virtual
circuits to both routers.
Examples
The following example shows setting the network to point-to-point type on the fxp0 interface.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf network point-to-point
Equivalent Commands
ospf network
ip ospf priority
Use the ip ospf priority command to set the router priority to determine the designated router for the network.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.
Command Syntax
ip ospf priority <1-255> (A.B.C.D)
no ip ospf priority (A.B.C.D)
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.
Default
The default priority is 1.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
Set the priority to help determine the OSPF Designated Router (DR) for a network. If two routers attempt to become the DR, the
router with the higher router priority becomes the DR. If the router priority is the same for two routers, the router with the higher
router ID takes precedence.
Only routers with nonzero router priority values are eligible to become the designated or backup designated router.
Configure router priority for multiaccess networks only and not for point-to-point networks.
Examples
The following example shows setting the OSPF priority value to 3 on the fxp0 interface for the IP address 10.10.10.50.
ospfd# configure terminal
174
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf priority 3 10.10.10.50
Related Commands
ip ospf network, neighbor
Equivalent Commands
ospf priority
ip ospf retransmit-interval
Use the ip ospf retransmit-internal command to specify the time between link-state advertisement (LSA) retransmissions for
adjacencies belonging to the interface.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.
Command Syntax
ip ospf retransmit-interval INTERVAL (A.B.C.D)
no ip ospf retransmit-interval (A.B.C.D)
INTERVAL= <3-65535> Specifies the time in seconds between retransmissions. Default interval value is 5
seconds.
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
After sending an LSA to a neighbor, the router keeps the LSA until it receives an acknowledgement. In case the router does not
receive an acknowledgement during the set time (the retransmit interval value) it retransmits the LSA.
Set the retransmission interval value conservatively to avoid needless retransmission. The interval should be greater than the
expected round-trip delay between two routers.
Examples
The following example shows setting the ospf retransmit interval to 6 seconds on the fxp0 interface for IP address 10.10.10.50.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf ospf retransmit-interval 6 10.10.10.50
Related Commands
ip ospf transmit-delay
Use the ip ospf transmit-delay command to set the estimated time it takes to transmit a link-state-update packet on the interface.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.
Command Syntax
ip ospf transmit-delay DELAY (A.B.C.D)
no ip ospf transmit-delay (A.B.C.D)
DELAY= <1-65535> Specifies the time taken, in seconds, to transmit a link-state-update. The default
transmit delay value is 1 second.
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
The transmit delay value adds a specified time to the age field of an update. If the delay is not added, the time in which the LSA
transmits over the link is not considered. This command is especially useful for low speed links. Add transmission and propagation
delays when setting the transmit delay value.
Examples
The following example shows setting the OSPF transmit delay time to 3 seconds on the fxp0 interface for IP address 10.10.10.50.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ip ospf transmit-delay 3 10.10.10.50
Equivalent Commands
ospf transmit-delay
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
login
Use this command to set a password prompt, before entering the configuration mode and to enable password checking.
Command Syntax
(no) login
Default
Enabled.
Command Mode
Line mode
Usage
Login is enabled by default. The no login command allows users to connect directly to the Priviledged Exec mode skipping the
password verification prompt. After using the no login command if the user changes to login command again, the system uses the
password being used earlier, unless the user specifies a password in the configure mode (see the following example).
Example
The following examples show the use of login and no login command. In this example, a password pass is set (in configure mode)
before using the login command.
!
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# line vty
ospfd(config-line)# no login
!
!
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd#(config)# password pass
ospfd#(config)# line vty
ospfd#(config-line)# login
!
Related Commands
match interface
Use the match interface command to define the interface match criterion.
Use the no form of this command to remove the specified match criterion.
Command Syntax
match interface IFNAME
no match interface
IFNAME A string that specifies the interface for matching.
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Route-map mode
Usage
To set the conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another, use the match and set route-map configuration
commands. The match commands specify the match criteria under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map. The
set commands specify the set redistribution actions to be performed, if the match criteria are met.
If a route does not match the criteria completely, it will not be advertised for outbound route-maps and neither be accepted for
inbound route-maps. You can modify the data by configuring a second route-map section with an explicit match specified.
Use the match interface command to match the first hop interface of a route.
Example
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# route-map mymap1 permit 10
ospfd(config-route-map)# match interface eth0
Related Commands
match tag, match route-type external
176
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
match metric
Use the match metric command to match the specified metric value. Use the no parameter to turn off the matching.
Command Syntax
(no) match metric METRICVALUE
METRICVALUE = <0-16777216>
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Route-map mode
Usage
To set the conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another, use the match and set route-mapconfiguration
commands. The match commands specify the match criteria under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map. The
set commands specify the set redistribution actions to be performed, if the match criteria are met.
If a route does not match the criteria completely, it will not be advertised for outbound route maps and neither be accepted for
inbound route maps. You can modify the data by configuring a second route-map section and specifying an explicit match.
Some types of LSAs have specific metric values.Use the match metric command to match metric value.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# route-map mymap1 permit 10
ospfd(config-route-map)# match metric 100
Related Commands
match tag, match route-type external
match route-type external
Use the match route-type external command to match specified external route type. Use the no parameter to turn off the matching.
Command Syntax
(no) match route-type external (type-1 | type-2)
Default
Disabled
Command Mode
Route-map mode
Usage
To set the conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another, use the match and set route-mapconfiguration
commands. The match commands specify the match criteria under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map. The
set commands specify the set redistribution actions to be performed, if the match criteria are met.
If a route does not match the criteria completely, it will not be advertised for outbound route maps and neither be accepted for
inbound route maps. You can modify the data by configuring a second route map section and specifying an explicit match.
Use the match route-type external command to match specific external route types. AS-external LSA is either Type-1 or Type-2.
External type-1 matches only Type 1 external routes and external type-2 matches only Type 2 external routes.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# route-map mymap1 permit 10
ospfd(config-route-map)# match route-type external type-1
Related Commands
match tag, match route-type external
match tag
Use the match tag command to match the specified tag value. Use the no parameter to turn off the declaration. Tag is
the route tag which is labeled by another routing protocol (BGP or other IGP when redistributing).
Command Syntax
(no) match tag <0-4294967295>
Default
Disabled
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Command Mode
Route-map mode
Usage
To set the conditions for redistributing routes from one routing protocol to another, use the match and set route-mapconfiguration
commands. The match commands specify the match criteria under which redistribution is allowed for the current route-map. The
set commands specify the set redistribution actions to be performed, if the match criteria are met.
If a route does not match the criteria completely, it will not be advertised for outbound route maps and neither be accepted for
inbound route maps. You can modify the data by configuring a second route map section with an explicit match specified.
Use the match tag command to match the specified tag value.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# route-map mymap1 permit 10
ospfd(config-route-map)# match tag 100
Related Commands
match metric, match route-type external
neighbor
Use the neighbor command to configure OSPF routers interconnecting to non-broadcast networks.
Use the no form of this command to remove a configuration.
Command Syntax
(no) neighbor NEIGHBORADDRESS PRIORITY|POLL
NEIGHBORADDRESS=A.B.C.D Specifies the interface IP address of the neighbor.
PRIORITY= priority <0-255> (POLL) Specifies the 8-bit number indicating the router priority value of the
non-broadcast neighbor associated with the IP address specified. The default is 0. This keyword does not
apply to point-to-multipoint interfaces.
POLL= poll-interval <1-65535> Dead neighbor polling interval in seconds. It is recommended to
set this value much higher than the hello interval. The default is 120 seconds.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
Configure a router as a broadcast network at the OSPF level. To do this, use the neighbor command and include one neighbor
entry for each known nonbroadcast network neighbor. Configure the neighbor address on the primary address of the interface.
Poll interval is the reduced rate at which routers continue to send hello packets, when a neighboring router has become inactive.
Set the poll interval to be much larger than hello interval (RFC 1247).
Examples
This example shows neighbor configured with a priority value and poll interval time.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# neighbor 1.2.3.4 priority 1 poll-interval 90
Related Commands
network area
Use the network area command to define the interfaces on which OSPF runs and to define the area ID for those interfaces.
Use the no form of this command to disable OSPF routing for interfaces defined with the address wildcard-mask pair.
Command Syntax
network AREAADDRESS/M area AREAID
no network
AREAADDRESS=A.B.C.D Specifies the network prefix covered by AREAID.
M Specifies the IP-address-type mask that includes "don't care" bits.
AREAID= A.B.C.D.|<0-4294967295> Specifies the area that is to be associated with the OSPF address
range. The area ID can be either a decimal value or an IP address.
Default
Disabled.
178
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
The address and mask define interfaces to be associated with a specific OSPF area. The primary address of the interface should be
covered by the network area command. Covering only the secondary address does not enable OSPF over that interface.
The mask is used as a shortcut and it helps putting a list of interfaces in the same area. The mask contains wild card bits where 0
is a match and 1 is a don't care bit. For example, 0.0.0.255 is a match in the first three bytes of the network number.
Any individual interface can only be attached to a single area. If the address ranges specified for the different areas overlap, the
software will adopt the first area in the network command list and ignore the subsequent overlapping portions.
Specify address ranges that do not overlap.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# network 10.0.0.0/8 area 3
ospfd(config-router)# network 10.0.0.0/8 area 1.1.1.1
Related commands
opaque
Use the opaque command to redistribute the specified scope of opaque-LSAs.
Command Syntax
opaque (link|area|as) WORD TYPE ID DATA
link flood opaque-LSA to link-local scope. i.e. the LSA is not flooded over any routers.
area flood opaque-LSA to single area. i.e. the routers in the same area should have the LSAs.
as flood opaque-LSA to whole AS. i.e. the routers in the single AS should have those LSAs.
WORD = if scope is link, WORD is an interface address.
if scope is area, WORD is an Area-ID.
if scope is as, WORD should be ignored.
TYPE = <0-256> Opaque type which is maintained by IANA.
ID = <0-16777216> Opaque ID which is the value specific to the Opaque type.
DATA = Actual Opaque Information which is stored into packet body of Opaque LSAs.
Default
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# opaque link mylink 128 65535 mylink
Related Commands
opaque-lsa-capable
Use the opaque-lsa-capable command to enable opaque-lsa; use the no parameter to disable it.
Command Syntax
(no) opaque-lsa-capable
Default
Enabled
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
Opaque-LSAs are Type 9, 10 and 11 LSAs that deliver information used by external applications.
When using this command, restart the OSPF router.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# opaque-lsa-capable
Related commands
ospf abr-type
Use the ospf abr-type command to set an OSPF area border router (ABR) type.
Use the no parameter to disable this function.
Command Syntax
ospf abr-type cisco|ibm|shortcut|standard
(no) ospf abr-type cisco|ibm|shortcut
cisco Specifies an alternative ABR using Cisco implementation.
ibm Specifies an alternative ABR using IBM implementation.
shortcut Specifies a shortcut ABR.
standard Specifies a standard behavior ABR that conforms to RFC 2328 (Default).
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
Specify the ABR type for better functioning between different implementations. This command is specially useful in a multivendor
environment.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# ospf abr-type standard
Related Commands
ospf authentication-key
Use the ospf authentication-key command to assign a password to be used by neighboring routers.
Use the no parameter to remove a previously assigned password.
Command Syntax
ospf authentication-key AUTHKEY
no ospf authentication-key
AUTHKEY Specifies the authentication password. Any continuous string of characters (not more than 8 bytes)
Default
Authentication password not specified.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
The authentication-key command creates a key (password) which is inserted into the OSPF header, when ZebOS software
originates routing protocols packets. You can assign a separate password to each network for different interfaces.
All neighboring routers on the same network must have the same password to enable exchange of OSPF information. The
password can be used only if authentication has been enabled for an area. Use the area authentication command to enable
authentication.
Simple password authentication allows a password to be configured per area. Configure the routers in the same routing domain
with the same password.
Examples
ospf authentication-key mykeykey
ospf authentication-key
Related Commands
ip ospf authentication-key, area authentication
ospf cost
Use the ospf cost command to explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interface.
Use the no form of this command to reset the cost of the path to default.
180
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Command Syntax
ospf cost COST
no ospf cost
COST = <1-65535> Specifies the link-state metric.The default value is 10.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
The interface cost indicates the overhead required to send packets across a certain interface. It is inversely proportional to
the bandwidth of that interface. By default, the cost of an interface is calculated based on the bandwidth (108/ bandwidth);
use this command to set cost manually.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ospf cost 10
Equivalent Commands
ip ospf cost
ospf dead-interval
Use the ospf dead-interval command to set the interval during which no hello packets are received and after which a neighbor is
declared dead.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function
Command Syntax
ospf dead-interval INTERVAL
no ospf dead-interval
INTERVAL= <1-65535> Specifies the interval in seconds. The default interval is 40 seconds
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
The dead-interval is the amount of time that the router waits to receive an OSPF hello packet from the neighbor before declaring
the neighbor down. This value is advertised in the router's hello packets. It must be a multiple of hello-interval and be the same
for all routers on a specific network.
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ospf dead-interval 10 10.10.10.50
Equivalent Commands
ip ospf dead-interval
ospf hello-interval
Use the ospf hello-interval command to specify the interval between hello packets that the ZebOS software
sends on the interface.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.
Command Syntax
ospf hello-interval INTERVAL
no ospf hello-interval
INTERVAL= <1-65535> Specifies the interval in seconds. The default interval is 10 seconds.
Default
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
Hello-interval is advertised in the hello packets. Configure the same hello-interval for all routers on a specific network. A shorter
hello interval ensures faster detection of topological changes but this also results in more routing traffic.
Examples
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ospf hello-interval 3 10.10.10.50
Equivalent Commands
ip ospf hello-interval
ospf network
Use the ospf network command to configure the OSPF network type to a type other than the default for a given medium.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.
Command Syntax
ospf network broadcast|non-broadcast|point-to-multipoint|point-to-point
no ospf network
broadcast Specifies OSPF braodcast as a multi-access network.
non-broadcast Sets the network type to NBMA.
point-to-multipoint Sets the network type to point-to-multipoint.
point-to-point Sets the network type to point-to-point.
Default
The default is the broadcast type.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
Use ospf network command to configure broadcast networks as nonbroadcast multiaccess networks (NBMA) and vice versa. You
would need to do this if you have routers in your network that do not support multicast addressing.
The ospf network command saves you from having to configure neighbors. Configuring NBMA networks requires a fully meshed
network or a virtual circuit connecting every router. In case the network is not fully meshed, configure the OSPF network type as
a point-to -multipoint network. Routing between two routers that are not directly connected will go through the router that has
virtual circuits to both routers.
Examples
The following example shows setting the network to point-to-point type on the fxp0 interface.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ospf network point-to-point
Equivalent Commands
ip ospf network
ospf priority
Use the ospf priority command to set the router priority, which helps determine the designated router for this network.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default value.
Command Syntax
ospf priority <1-255>
no ospf priority
Default
The default priority is 1.
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
Set the priority to help determine the OSPF Designated Router (DR) for a network. If two routers attempt to become the DR, the
router with the higher router priority becomes the DR. If the router priority is the same for two routers, the router with the higher
router ID becomes DR.
Only a router with a nonzero router priority value is eligible to become the designated or backup designated router.
Configure router priority for multiaccess networks only, and not for point-to-point networks.
Examples
The following example shows setting the OSPF priority value to 3 on the fxp0 interface for IP address 10.10.10.50.
182
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ospf priority 3 10.10.10.50
Related Commands
show ip ospf
Equivalent Commands
ip ospf priority
ospf router-id
Use the ospf router-id command to specify a router ID for the OSPF process.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
ospf router-id IPADDRESS
no ospf router-id
IPADDRESS Specifies the router ID in IPv4 address format.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
Configure each router with a unique router-id. In an OSPF router process which has active neighbors, a new router-id is
used at the next reload or when you start the OSPF manually.
Examples
The following example shows a specified router ID 2.3.4.5.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# ospf router-id 2.3.4.5
Related Commands
show ip ospf neighbor
ospf transmit-delay
Use the ospf transmit-delay command to set the estimated time it takes to transmit a link-state-update packet.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function
Command Syntax
ospf transmit-delay DELAY
no ospf transmit-delay
DELAY= <1-65535> the delay in seconds. The default transmit delay value is 1 second
Command Mode
Interface mode
Usage
The transmit delay value adds a specified time to the age field of an update. If the delay is not added, the time in which the LSA
transmits over the link is not considered. This command is especially useful for low speed links. Add transmission and propagation
delays when setting the transmit delay value.
Examples
The following example shows setting the OSPF transmit-delay time to 3 seconds on the fxp0 interface for the IP address
10.10.10.50.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# interface fxp0
ospfd(config-if)# ospf transmit-delay 3 10.10.10.50
Equivalent Commands
ip ospf transmit-delay
passive-interface
Use this command to suppress the routing updates on the specified interface.
Command Syntax
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
passive-interface INTERFACENAME (A.B.C.D)
INTERFACENAME = The name of the interface.
A.B.C.D = IP address of the interface.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
The passive-interface command is used to configure OSPF on simplex Ethernet interfaces. Since the simplex interfaces represent
only one network segment between two devices, configure the transmitting interface as a passive interface. This ensures that OSPF
does not send hello packets for the transmitting interface. Both the devices can see each other via the hello packet generated for
the receiving interface.
Examples
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# passive-interface fxp0
Related Commands
redistribute
Use the redistribute command to redistribute routes from other routing protocols, static routes and kernel routes into an ospf
routing table.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
redistribute PROTOCOL (METRICS|ROUTE)
no redistribute PROTOCOL
PROTOCOL= bgp|rip| ospf| connected|static|kernel
bgp Specifies BGP.
connected Specifies connected routes.
ospf6 Specifies OSPF v3. ( Visible only if OSPFv3 is enabled on the system)
rip Specifies RIP.
ripng Specifies RIPng. (Visible only if ripng is enabled on the system)
static Specifies static routes.
kernel Specifies kernel routes.
METRICS= [METRIC METRIC-TYPE]|[METRIC-TYPE METRIC]
METRIC= metric <1-16777214> (ROUTE)
METRIC-TYPE= metric-type <1-2> (ROUTE)
ROUTE= route-map WORD
WORD= pointer to route-map entries list. A route-map is a series of rule-sets defined in privileged Exec
mode.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
Examples
The following example shows redistribution of bgp routes into ospf routing table, with metric as 12.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# redistribute bgp metric 12
Related Commands
refresh timer
Use the refresh timer command to adjust refresh parameters.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
Command Syntax
(no) refresh timer TIMERVALUE
TIMERVALUE = <10-1800> Timer value in seconds. The default refresh time is 10 seconds.
Command Mode
184
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Router mode
Usage
Examples
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# refresh timer 12
Related Commands
router-id
Use the router-id command to set a fixed router-id.
Use the no form of this command to force OSPF to use the previous OSPF router-id behavior.
Command Syntax
router-id IPADDRESS
no router-id
IPADDRESS Specifies the router ID in IPv4 address format.
Default
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
Examples
The following example shows a fixed router ID 10.10.10.60
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# router-id 10.10.10.60
Related Commands
router ospf
Use the router ospf command to enter router mode and to configure an OSPF routing process. Specify the process ID with this
command to configure multiple instances.
Use the no form of this command to terminate an OSPF routing process. Use the no form of this command with the process ID
parameter, to terminate and delete a specific OSPF routing process.
Command Syntax
(no) router ospf
(no) router ospf PROCESSID
PROCESSID = <1-65535> Any positive integer identifying a routing process. The process ID should be
unique for each routing process.
Default
No routing process defined.
Command Mode
Configure mode
Usage
For releases starting with 1.1, router ospf command forces the router into compatibility mode. This mode supports only one OSPF
instance and prevents the creation of other instances of OSPF. For multiple instances-- first, use the norouter ospf command to end
the single instance routing process, and then, configure multiple instances by specifying the process ID parameter for each
instance.
Examples
This example shows the use of router ospf command to enter router mode. Note the change in the prompt.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf
ospfd(config-router)#
Related Commands
set metric-type
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Use the set metric-type command to set the metric type for the destination routing protocol.
Use the no form of this command to return to the default.
Command Syntax
(no) set metric-type 1|2
1 = Select to set external type 1 metric.
2 = Select to set external type 2 metric.
Default
Command Mode
Route-map mode
Usage
Examples
In this example the metric type of the destination protocol is set to OSPF external Type 1.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# route-map rmap1 permit 3
ospfd(config-route-map)# set metric-type 1
Related Commands
set next-hop
Use the set next-hop command to specify the next-hop address. Use the no parameter of this command to reset the
default next-hop value.
Command Syntax
(no) set next-hop A.B.C.D
A.B.C.D = IP address of the next hop router.
Default
Command Mode
Route-map mode
Usage
Every routing table entry has a next-hop value. Once the next-hop value is calculated, the router gives the value to the forwarding
engine.
To set the next-hop, you must first have a match clause. Match and set commands set the conditions for redistributing routes from
one routing protocol to another. The match command specifies the match criteria under which redistribution is allowed for the
current route-map. The set command specifies the set redistribution actions to be performed, if the match criteria are met.
Examples
In the following example, routes that pass the access list have the next hop set to 10.10.12.50:
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# route-map rmap1 permit 3
ospfd(config-route-map)# set next-hop 10.10.12.50
Related Commands
set tag
Use the set tag command to set specified tag value. Use the no form of this command to return to the default.
Command Syntax
(no) set tag TAGVALUE
TAGVALUE = <0-4294967295> Tag value for destination routing protocol.
Default
Command Mode
Route-map mode
Usage
Tag in this command is the route tag which is labeled by another routing protocol (BGP or other IGP when redistributing), because
AS-external-LSA has route-tag field in its LSAs. And also with using route-map, ospfd can tag the LSAs with appropriate tag
value. Sometimes tag matches with using route-map, and sometimes the value may be used by another application.
Examples
In the following example the tag value of the destination routing protocol is set to 6:
186
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# route-map rmap1 permit 3
ospfd(config-route-map)# set tag 6
Related Commands
show debugging ospf
Use the show debugging ospf command to display the set OSPF debugging option.
Command Syntax
show debugging ospf
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
This is a sample output from the show debugging ospf command. Some lines in this output wrap around, they might not wrap
around in the actual display.
ospfd# show debugging ospf
OSPF debugging status:
OSPF packet Link State Update debugging is on
OSPF all events debugging is on
ospfd# te mo
ospfd# 2002/05/09 14:08:11 OSPF: RECV[LS-Upd]: From 10.10.10.70 via eth0:10.10.10.50(10.10.10.10 -> 224.0.0.5)
2002/05/09 14:08:11 OSPF: LSA[10.10.10.10:10.10.10.70]: instance(0x8139cd0) created withLink State Update
2002/05/09 14:08:11 OSPF: RECV[LS-Upd]: From 10.10.10.70 via eth0:10.10.10.50 (10.10.10.10-> 224.0.0.5)
2002/05/09 14:08:11 OSPF: LSA[10.10.10.70:10.10.10.70]: instance(0x813c688) created withLink State Update
2002/05/09 14:08:52 OSPF: RECV[LS-Upd]: From 10.10.10.70 via eth0:10.10.10.50 (10.10.10.10-> 224.0.0.5)
2002/05/09 14:08:52 OSPF: LSA[20.2.2.0:10.10.10.70]: instance(0x813a8e8) created with LinkState Update
2002/05/09 14:08:52 OSPF: LSA[40.2.2.0:10.10.10.70]: instance(0x8138be0) created with LinkState Update
2002/05/09 14:11:12 OSPF: RECV[LS-Upd]: From 10.10.10.70 via eth0:10.10.10.50 (10.10.10.10-> 224.0.0.5)
2002/05/09 14:11:12 OSPF: LSA[10.10.11.0:10.10.10.70]: instance(0x813c410) created withLink State Update
2002/05/09 14:12:33 OSPF: SEND[LS-Upd]: Begin send queue
2002/05/09 14:12:33 OSPF: SEND[LS-Upd]: # of LSAs 1, destination 224.0.0.5
2002/05/09 14:12:33 OSPF: SEND[LS-Upd]: End send queue
2002/05/09 14:12:33 OSPF: SEND[LS-Upd]: To 224.0.0.5 via eth0:10.10.10.50.
Examples
ospfd# show debugging ospf
Related Commands
show ip ospf
Use the show ip ospf command to display general information about all OSPF routing processes. Include the processID parameter
with this command to display information about specified instances.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf
show ip ospf PROCESSID
PROCESSID = <0-65535> The ID of the router process for which information will be displayed. If this
parameter is included, only the information for the specified routing process is displayed.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
The following are sample outputs from the show ip ospf command with and without the process ID parameter. Notice that the first
output (without process ID), shows information about both instances and the second and third outputs show information only
about the instances specified by the process ID.
ospfd# show ip ospf
OSPF Routing Process 1, Router ID: 10.10.11.60
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes
This implementation conforms to RFC2328
RFC1583Compatibility flag is disabled
Opaque-LSA capability is on
SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs
Refresh timer 10 secs
Number of external LSA 0
Number of non-default external LSA 0
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
External LSA database is unlimited.
Number of areas attached to this router: 1
Area ID: 0.0.0.1
Shortcutting mode: Default, S-bit consensus: ok
Number of interfaces in this area: Total: 1, Active: 1
Number of fully adjacent neighbors in this area: 0
Area has no authentication
Number of full virtual adjacencies going through this area: 0
SPF algorithm executed 1 times
Number of LSA 1
OSPF Routing Process 100, Router ID: 10.10.11.60
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes
This implementation conforms to RFC2328
RFC1583Compatibility flag is disabled
Opaque-LSA capability is on
SPF schedule delay 0 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 0 secs
Refresh timer 10 secs
Number of external LSA 0
Number of non-default external LSA 0
External LSA database is unlimited.
Number of areas attached to this router: 1
Area ID: 0.0.0.0 (Backbone)
Number of interfaces in this area: Total: 0, Active: 0
Number of fully adjacent neighbors in this area: 0
Area has no authentication
SPF algorithm executed 1 times
Number of LSA 1
ospfd# show ip ospf 1
OSPF Routing Process 1, Router ID: 10.10.11.60
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes
This implementation conforms to RFC2328
RFC1583Compatibility flag is disabled
Opaque-LSA capability is on
SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs
Refresh timer 10 secs
Number of external LSA 0
Number of non-default external LSA 0
External LSA database is unlimited.
Number of areas attached to this router: 1
Area ID: 0.0.0.1
Shortcutting mode: Default, S-bit consensus: ok
Number of interfaces in this area: Total: 1, Active: 1
Number of fully adjacent neighbors in this area: 0
Area has no authentication
Number of full virtual adjacencies going through this area: 0
SPF algorithm executed 1 times
Number of LSA 1
ospfd# show ip ospf 100
OSPF Routing Process 100, Router ID: 10.10.11.60
Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes
This implementation conforms to RFC2328
RFC1583Compatibility flag is disabled
Opaque-LSA capability is on
SPF schedule delay 0 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 0 secs
Refresh timer 10 secs
Number of external LSA 0
Number of non-default external LSA 0
External LSA database is unlimited.
Number of areas attached to this router: 1
Area ID: 0.0.0.0 (Backbone)
Number of interfaces in this area: Total: 0, Active: 0
Number of fully adjacent neighbors in this area: 0
Area has no authentication
SPF algorithm executed 1 times
Number of LSA 1
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf
ospfd# show ip ospf 100
Related Commands
router ospf
show ip ospf border-routers
Use the show ip ospf border-routers command to display the ABRs and ASBRs for all OSPF instances. Include the process ID
188
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
parameter with this command to view data about specified instances.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf border-routers
show ip ospf PROCESSID border-routers
PROCESSID = <0-65535> The ID of the router process for which information will be displayed.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
This is a sample output from the show ip ospf border-routers command.
ospfd# show ip ospf border-routers
OSPF process 100
============ OSPF router routing table =============
R
10.10.10.70
[10] area: 0.0.0.0, ASBR
via 10.10.10.10, eth0
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf border-routers
ospfd# show ip ospf 721 border-routers
Related Commands
show ip ospf database
Use this command to display a database summary for OSPF information. This command displays BGP tags for prefixes.
Include the process ID parameter with this command to display information about specified instances.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf database(self-originate|max-age)
show ip ospf PROCESSID database (self-originate|max-age)
PROCESSID = <0-65535> The ID of the router process for which information will be displayed.
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.
max-age Displays LSAs in MaxAge list.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
The following are sample outputs from the show ip ospf database command with and without the process ID parameter. Notice
that the first output (without process ID), shows database information about both the instances and the second and third outputs
show database information only about the instances specified by the process ID. The last two displays show the use of the self-
originate and max-age parameters.
ospfd# show ip ospf database
OSPF Router process 1 with ID (10.10.11.60)
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
Link ID
10.10.11.60
ADV Router
10.10.11.60
Age Seq#
32 0x80000002 0x472b 1
CkSum Link count
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.60)
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link ID
10.10.11.60
ADV Router
10.10.11.60
Age Seq#
219 0x80000001 0x4f5d 0
CkSum Link count
ospfd# show ip ospf 1 database
OSPF Router process 1 with ID (10.10.11.60)
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
Link ID
10.10.11.60
ADV Router
10.10.11.60
Age Seq#
43 0x80000002 0x472b 1
CkSum Link count
ospfd# show ip ospf 100 database
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.60)
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link ID
10.10.11.60
ADV Router
10.10.11.60
Age Seq#
244 0x80000001 0x4f5d 0
CkSum Link count
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
Link ID
10.10.11.50
ADV Router
10.10.11.50
Age Seq#
20 0x80000007 0x65c3 2
CkSum Link count
Area-Local Opaque-LSA (Area 0.0.0.1 )
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Link ID
67.1.4.217
ADV Router
10.10.11.50
Age Seq#
37 0x80000001 0x2129 66777
CkSum Opaque ID
AS-Global Opaque-LSA
Link ID
67.1.4.217
ADV Router
10.10.11.50
Age Seq#
37 0x80000001 0x2daa 66777
CkSum Opaque ID
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)
MaxAge Link States:
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate
ospfd# show ip 1 ospf database max-age
ospfd# show ip 100 ospf database router adv-router 2.3.4.5
Related Commands
show ip ospf database asbr-summary
Use the show ip ospf database asbr-summary command to display information about the Autonomous System
Boundary Router (ASBR) summary LSAs.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf database asbr-summary (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5
Related Commands
show ip ospf database external
Use this command to display information about the external LSAs.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf database external (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
This is a sample output from the show ip ospf database external command with the self-originate option selected.
ospfd# show ip ospf database external self-originate
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)
AS External Link States
LS age: 298
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: AS-external-LSA
Link State ID: 10.10.100.0 (External Network Number)
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0x7033
Length: 36
Network Mask: /24
Metric Type: 2 (Larger than any link state path)
190
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
TOS: 0
Metric: 20
Forward Address: 10.10.11.50
External Route Tag: 0
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5
Related Commands
show ip ospf database network
Use the show ip ospf database network command to display information about the network LSAs.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf database network (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
The following is a sample output from the show ip ospf database network command, with and without the advrouter
option selected:
ospfd# show ip ospf database network
OSPF Router process 200 with ID (192.30.30.2)
Net Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
LS age: 1175
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: network-LSA
Link State ID: 192.10.10.9 (address of Designated Router)
Advertising Router: 192.30.30.3
LS Seq Number: 80000002
Checksum: 0xdfb1
Length: 32
Network Mask: /24
Attached Router: 192.20.20.1
Attached Router: 192.30.30.3
LS age: 1327
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: network-LSA
Link State ID: 192.20.20.2 (address of Designated Router)
Advertising Router: 192.20.20.2
LS Seq Number: 8000000d
Checksum: 0xbce6
Length: 32
Network Mask: /24
Attached Router: 192.20.20.1
Attached Router: 192.20.20.2
LS age: 1278
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: network-LSA
Link State ID: 192.30.30.3 (address of Designated Router)
Advertising Router: 192.30.30.3
Advertising Router: 192.30.30.3
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0x0556
Length: 32
Network Mask: /24
Attached Router: 192.30.30.2
Attached Router: 192.30.30.3
LS age: 1436
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: network-LSA
Link State ID: 192.40.40.2 (address of Designated Router)
Advertising Router: 192.20.20.2
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
LS Seq Number: 8000000e
Checksum: 0xf173
Length: 32
Network Mask: /24
Attached Router: 192.20.20.2
Attached Router: 192.30.30.2
ospfd# show ip ospf database network adv-router 192.30.30.3
OSPF Router process 200 with ID (192.30.30.2)
Net Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
LS age: 1387
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: network-LSA
Link State ID: 192.10.10.9 (address of Designated Router)
Advertising Router: 192.30.30.3
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0xe1b0
Length: 32
Network Mask: /24
Attached Router: 192.20.20.1
Attached Router: 192.30.30.3
LS age: 1648
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: network-LSA
Link State ID: 192.30.30.3 (address of Designated Router)
Advertising Router: 192.30.30.3
LS Seq Number: 8000000f
Checksum: 0xe864
Length: 32
Network Mask: /24
Attached Router: 192.30.30.2
Attached Router: 192.30.30.3
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5
Related Commands
show ip ospf database opaque-area
Use the show ip ospf database opaque-area command to display information about the area-local (link state type 10) scope LSAs.
Type-10 Opaque LSAs are not flooded beyond the borders of their associated area.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf database opaque-area (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
The following is a sample output from the show ip ospf database opaque-area command, with the selforiginate option selected.
ospfd# show ip ospf database opaque-area self-originate
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)
Area-Local Opaque-LSA (Area 0.0.0.0)
LS age: 262
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: Area-Local Opaque-LSA
Link State ID: 10.0.25.176 (Area-Local Opaque-Type/ID)
Opaque Type: 10
Opaque ID: 6576
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0xb413
Length: 26
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate
192
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5
Related Commands
show ip ospf database opaque-link
Use the show ip ospf database opaque-link command to display information about the link-state type 9 LSAs.
This type denotes a link-local scope. The LSAs are not flooded beyond the local network.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf database opaque-link (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
The following is a sample output from the show ip ospf database opaque-link command, with a link-state
selected.
ospfd# show ip ospf database opaque-link 10.0.220.247
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)
Link-Local Opaque-LSA (Link hme0:10.10.10.50)
LS age: 276
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: Link-Local Opaque-LSA
Link State ID: 10.0.220.247 (Link-Local Opaque-Type/ID)
Opaque Type: 10
Opaque ID: 56567
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0x744e
Length: 26
Link-Local Opaque-LSA (Link hme1:10.10.11.50)
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5
Related Commands
show ip ospf database router
Use the show ip ospf database router command to display information only about the router LSAs.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf database router (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
The following is a sample output from the show ip ospf database router command, with the ip address selected.
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 10.10.11.50
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
LS age: 878
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
Flags: 0x3 : ABR ASBR
LS Type: router-LSA
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Link State ID: 10.10.11.50
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50
LS Seq Number: 80000004
Checksum: 0xe39e
Length: 36
Number of Links: 1
Link connected to: Stub Network
(Link ID) Network/subnet number: 10.10.10.0
(Link Data) Network Mask: 255.255.255.0
Number of TOS metrics: 0
TOS 0 Metric: 10
Router Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
LS age: 877
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
Flags: 0x3 : ABR ASBR
LS Type: router-LSA
Link State ID: 10.10.11.50
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50
LS Seq Number: 80000003
Checksum: 0xee93
Length: 36
Number of Links: 1
Link connected to: Stub Network
(Link ID) Network/subnet number: 10.10.11.0
(Link Data) Network Mask: 255.255.255.0
Number of TOS metrics: 0
TOS 0 Metric: 10
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5
Related Commands
show ip ospf database summary
Use the show ip ospf database summary command to display information about the summary LSAs.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf database summary (A.B.C.D)(self-originate|ADVROUTER)
ADVROUTER = adv-router A.B.C.D
adv-router Displays all the LSAs of the specified router.
A.B.C.D A link state ID (as an IP address).
self-originate Displays self-originated link states.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
The following are the sample outputs from the show ip ospf database summary command, using the selforiginate,
adv-router and ip address options.
ospfd# show ip ospf database summary 10.10.10.0
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
LS age: 1124
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: summary-LSA
Link State ID: 10.10.10.0 (summary Network Number)
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0x41a2
Length: 28
Network Mask: /24
TOS: 0 Metric: 10
ospfd# show ip ospf database summary self-originate
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
LS age: 1061
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
194
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
LS Type: summary-LSA
Link State ID: 10.10.11.0 (summary Network Number)
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0x36ac
Length: 28
Network Mask: /24
TOS: 0 Metric: 10
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
LS age: 1061
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: summary-LSA
Link State ID: 10.10.11.0 (summary Network Number)
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0x36ac
Length: 28
Network Mask: /24
TOS: 0 Metric: 10
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
LS age: 1061
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: summary-LSA
Link State ID: 10.10.10.0 (summary Network Number)
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0x41a2
Length: 28
Network Mask: /24
TOS: 0 Metric: 10
ospfd# show ip ospf database summary adv-router 10.10.11.50
OSPF Router process 100 with ID (10.10.11.50)
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
LS age: 989
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: summary-LSA
Link State ID: 10.10.11.0 (summary Network Number)
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0x36ac
Length: 28
Network Mask: /24
TOS: 0 Metric: 10
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
LS age: 989
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: summary-LSA
Link State ID: 10.10.11.0 (summary Network Number)
Advertising Router: 10.10.11.50
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0x36ac
Length: 28
Network Mask: /24
TOS: 0 Metric: 10
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf database external 1.2.3.4 self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database self-originate
ospfd# show ip ospf database max-age
ospfd# show ip ospf database router 1.2.3.4 adv-router 2.3.4.5
Related Commands
show ip ospf interface
Use the show ip ospf interface command to display interface information for OSPF.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf interface IFNAME
IFNAME= An alphanumeric string that is the interface name.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
The following is a sample output from the show ip ospf interface command.
ospfd# show ip ospf interface hme0
hme0 is up, line protocol is up
Internet Address 10.10.10.50/24, Area 0.0.0.0
Router ID 10.10.11.50, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10
Transmit Delay is 5 sec, State Waiting, Priority 1
No designated router on this network
No backup designated router on this network
Timer intervals configured, Hello 35, Dead 35, Wait 35, Retransmit 5
Hello due in 00:00:16
Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf interface myifname
Related Commands
show ip ospf neighbor
Use the show ip ospf neighbor command to display information on OSPF neighbors. Include the process ID parameter with this
command to display information about specified instances.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf neighbor A.B.C.D|all|DETAIL|INTERFACE
show ip ospf PROCESSID neighbor A.B.C.D|all|DETAIL|INTERFACE
PROCESSID = <0-65535> The ID of the router process for which information will be displayed.
A.B.C.D = A.B.C.D (detail) Neighbor ID.
all = Include downstatus neighbor
DETAIL = detail (all) Detail of all neighbors
INTERFACE = Interface (A.B.C.D)
A.B.C.D = Address of the interface
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
The following are sample outputs from the show ip ospf neighbor command with and without the process IDparameter. Notice that
the first output (without process ID), shows database information about both the instances and the second and third outputs show
database information only about the instances specified by the process ID. The last two displays show the use of the detail and all
parameters.
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor
OSPF process 1:
Neighbor ID
RqstL DBsmL
10.10.11.50
Pri State Dead Time Address Interface
RXmtL
5
Full/DR
00:00:40 10.10.10.50
eth1:10.10.10.90
0
0
0
OSPF process 100:
Neighbor ID
RqstL DBsmL
10.10.11.50
Pri State
Dead Time Address
00:00:40 10.10.10.50
Interface
RXmtL
0
5
Full/DR
eth2:10.10.11.90
0
0
ospfd# show ip ospf 1 neighbor
OSPF process 1:
Neighbor ID
RqstL DBsmL
10.10.11.50
Pri State
Dead Time Address
00:00:40 10.10.10.50
Interface
RXmtL
0
5
Full/DR
eth1:10.10.10.90
0
0
ospfd# show ip ospf 100 neighbor
OSPF process 100:
Neighbor ID
RqstL DBsmL
10.10.11.50
Pri State
Dead Time Address
00:00:40 10.10.10.50
Interface
RXmtL
0
5
Full/DR
eth2:10.10.11.90
0
0
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor all
OSPF process 100:
Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address
Interface
RXmtL RqstL DBsmL
10.10.11.51
1
Full/DR 00:00:38 10.10.10.10 hme0:10.10.10.50
0
0
0
196
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
10.10.11.51
ospfd#
1
Full/DR 00:00:38 10.10.11.10 hme1:10.10.11.50
0
0
0
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor detail
Neighbor 10.10.11.51, interface address 10.10.10.10
In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface hme0
Neighbor priority is 1, State is Full, 6 state changes
DR is 10.10.10.10, BDR is 10.10.10.50
Options 66 *|O|-|-|-|-|E|-
Dead timer due in 00:00:32
Database Summary List 0
Link State Request List 0
Link State Retransmission List 0
Thread Inactivity Timer on
Thread Database Description Retransmision off
Thread Link State Request Retransmission off
Thread Link State Update Retransmission on
Neighbor 10.10.11.51, interface address 10.10.11.10
In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface hme1
Neighbor priority is 1, State is Full, 6 state changes
DR is 10.10.11.10, BDR is 10.10.11.50
Options 66 *|O|-|-|-|-|E|-
Dead timer due in 00:00:32
Database Summary List 0
Link State Request List 0
Link State Retransmission List 0
Thread Inactivity Timer on
Thread Database Description Retransmision off
Thread Link State Request Retransmission off
Thread Link State Update Retransmission on
Neighbor 10.10.11.51, interface address 10.10.11.10
In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface hme1
Neighbor priority is 1, State is Full, 6 state changes
DR is 10.10.11.10, BDR is 10.10.11.50
Options 66 *|O|-|-|-|-|E|-
Dead timer due in 00:00:32
Database Summary List 0
Link State Request List 0
Link State Retransmission List 0
Thread Inactivity Timer on
Thread Database Description Retransmision off
Thread Link State Request Retransmission off
Thread Link State Update Retransmission on
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor detail
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor 1.2.3.4
ospfd# show ip ospf neighbor myifname detail all
Related Commands
show ip ospf route
Use the show ip ospf route command to display the OSPF routing table. Include the process ID parameter with this command to
display the OSPF routing table for specified instances.
Command Syntax
show ip ospf route
show ip ospf PROCESSID route
PROCESSID = <0-65535> The ID of the router process for which information will be displayed. If this
parameter is included, only the information for this specified routing process is displayed.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
The following are sample outputs from the show ip ospf route command with and without the process ID parameter. Notice that
the first output (without process ID), shows information about both the instances and the second and third outputs show
information only about the instances specified by the process ID.
ospfd# show ip ospf route
OSPF process 100:
============ OSPF network routing table ============
N
10.10.10.0/24
[10] area: 0.0.0.0
directly attached to eth1
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
============ OSPF router routing table =============
============ OSPF external routing table ===========
OSPF process 110:
============ OSPF network routing table ============
N
10.10.11.0/24
[10] area: 0.0.0.1
directly attached to eth2
============ OSPF router routing table =============
============ OSPF external routing table ===========
ospfd#
ospfd# show ip ospf 100 route
OSPF process 100:
============ OSPF network routing table ============
N
10.10.10.0/24
[10] area: 0.0.0.0
directly attached to eth1
============ OSPF router routing table =============
============ OSPF external routing table ===========
ospfd#
ospfd# show ip ospf 110 route
OSPF process 110:
============ OSPF network routing table ============
N
10.10.11.0/24
[10] area: 0.0.0.1
directly attached to eth2
============ OSPF router routing table =============
============ OSPF external routing table ===========
ospfd#
Examples
ospfd# show ip ospf route
Related Commands
show ip protocols
Use the show ip protocols command to display OSPF process parameters and statistics.
Command Syntax
show ip protocols
There are no arguments or keywords for this command.
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode
Usage
This is an example of the output from the show ip protocols command:
ospfd# show ip protocols
Routing Protocol is "ospf 200"
Invalid after 0 seconds, hold down 0, flushed after 0
Outgoing update filter list for all interfaces is
Redistributed kernel filterd by filter1
Incoming update filter list for all interfaces is
Redistributing: kernel
Routing for Networks:
192.30.30.0/24
192.40.40.0/24
Routing Information Sources:
Gateway
Distance: (default is 110)
Address
Distance
Last Update
Distance List
Mask
Examples
ospfd# show ip protocols
show memory all
Use the show memory all command to display all memory statistics.
Command Syntax
show memory all
Command Mode
198
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Priviledged Exec mode and Exec mode
Usage
Following is a sample output of the show memory all command showing information about all the routing protocols.
Please note that this is not the complete output but a sample of the output.
ospfd# show memory all
Memory type
: Alloc count Alloc memory
===========================================================
Hash
:
1
20
64
0
Hash Index
Hash Bucket
Thread master
Thread
Link List
Link Node
:
:
:
1
0
1
196
:
:
28
394
382
1008
7880
4584
56
:
Buffer
:
2
Route node
VR data block
Config password
Config handle
Temporary memory
Access List
Label pool server
Label pool server
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
1
6
:
1
16
:
1
32
:
0
0
:
:
0
0
0
0
-----------------------------------------------
ZebOS RIB
:
0
0
ZebOS IPv4 Static
ZebOS IPv6 Static
ZebOS RA
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
ZebOS RA conf
ZebOS RA Prefix
ZebOS Home Agent
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
-----------------------------------------------
RIP structure
RIP route info
RIP interface
RIP i/f name
RIP passive i/f
:
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
-----------------------------------------------
RIPng structure
RIPng route info
RIPng aggregate info
RIPng interface
RIPng i/f name
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
:
:
0
0
0
0
-----------------------------------------------
OSPF table
OSPF node
OSPF prefix
:
47
26
26
780
764
247
:
:
-----------------------------------------------
OSPF structure
OSPF area
:
:
1
1
2
0
1600
108
368
0
0
0
88
24
52
48
:
OSPF interface
OSPF neighbor
OSPF SPF vertex
OSPF SPF nexthop
OSPF route
OSPF path
OSPF LSA
OSPF LSA data
OSPF LSDB
OSPF distance
:
:
:
0
0
:
:
:
2
2
1
:
1
4
:
576
0
:
0
-----------------------------------------------
OSPF network
:
2
0
0
0
22
0
0
OSPF virtual-link
OSPF if params
OSPF passive if
:
:
:
0
-----------------------------------------------
BGP peer
-----------------------------------------------
:
0
0
BGP adjacency
BGP advertise
BGP advertise attr
BGP adjin
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
0
0
-----------------------------------------------
BGP attribute
:
0
0
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
BGP aspath
:
0
0
BGP aspath seg
BGP aspath str
Community
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
-----------------------------------------------
LDP structure
LDP interface
LDP Adjacencies
LDP Sessions
LDP FECs
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
:
:
0
0
0
0
-----------------------------------------------
RSVP structure
RSVP interface
:
:
0
0
0
0
RSVP write queue node
RSVP route record object
:
:
0
0
0
0
-----------------------------------------------
ISIS node
ISIS table
vprefix
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
0
0
ISIS instance
ISIS neighbor
:
0
0
0
0
:
Examples
ospfd# show memory all
Related Commands
show memory lib, show memory ospf
show memory lib
Use the show memory lib command to display memory statistics for the ZebOS library.
Command Syntax
show memory lib
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode and Exec mode
Usage
The following is a sample output from the show memory lib command displaying ZebOS library statistics.
ospfd# show memory lib
Memory type
: Alloc count Alloc memory
===========================================================
Hash
Hash Index
:
1
20
64
:
1
Hash Bucket
Thread master
Thread
Link List
Link Node
Buffer
Buffer backet
Buffer data
:
:
0
1
0
196
:
:
28
1008
7880
4584
56
192
394
382
:
:
2
:
8
:
8
1724
Buffer iov
:
0
0
Prefix
:
156
3120
Prefix IPv4
Prefix IPv6
Route table
Route node
VR data block
User data
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
:
:
0
:
0
RMM data block
RMM Message
RMM dummy client
Smux subtree
Command strvec
Command desc
Config memory
Config login
Config password
Config handle
Temporary memory
Access List
Access List Str
Access Filter
Prefix List
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
6761
3396
3
117184
27168
58
0
6
16
:
0
:
1
:
1
:
1
32
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
:
200
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
Prefix List Str
Prefix List Entry
Route map
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
:
Route map name
Route map index
Route map rule
Route map rule str
Stream
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
0
0
0
0
:
:
2
0
48
0
Key
Key chain
:
0
0
VTY
VTY Path
:
2
239896
0
:
0
Label block node
Label pool server
Label pool server
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
Examples
ospfd# show memory lib
Related Commands
show memory all, show memory ospf
show memory ospf
Use the show memory ospf command to display memory statistics for the OSPF protocol.
Command Syntax
show memory ospf
Command Mode
Priviledged Exec mode and Exec mode
Usage
The following is a sample output from the show memory ospf command displaying OSPF statistics
ospfd# show memory ospf
Memory type
: Alloc count Alloc memory
===========================================================
OSPF table
OSPF node
OSPF prefix
:
102
53
53
1660
1528
515
:
:
-----------------------------------------------
OSPF structure
OSPF area
:
1
2
2
2
1600
216
368
336
0
:
OSPF interface
OSPF neighbor
OSPF SPF vertex
OSPF SPF nexthop
OSPF route
:
:
:
0
0
:
0
:
:
3
3
132
36
OSPF path
OSPF LSA
OSPF LSA data
OSPF LSDB
OSPF LS Request
OSPF packet
OSPF FIFO queue
OSPF extern info
OSPF distance
:
7
7
9
364
224
1296
0
16
24
32
0
:
:
:
0
:
1
:
2
:
:
1
0
-----------------------------------------------
OSPF network
:
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
22
0
0
0
0
OSPF virtual-link
OSPF if params
OSPF passive if
OSPF auth key
OSPF crypt key
OSPF area range
OSPF summary addr
OSPF static nbr
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
-----------------------------------------------
OSPF opaque data
OSPF Opq-LSA show
OSPF notifier
:
0
0
:
0
0
:
0
0
OSPF description
OSPF API data
OSPF message
:
:
:
0
0
0
0
0
0
OSPF tmp mem
:
2
16
Examples
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
TECHNICAL: 0118 96 56 000
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dual Trunk E1 Router
ospfd# show memory ospf
Related Commands
show memory all, show memory lib
summary-address
Use the summary-address command to summarize or suppress external routes with the specified address range.
Command Syntax
summary-address A.B.C.D/M (not-advertise)(tag <0-4294967295>)
A.B.C.D/M = The range of addresses given as IPv4 starting address and a mask indicating the range.
not-advertise Suppresses external routes.
tag <0-4294967295> The default tag value is 0.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
An address range is a pairing of an address and a mask that is almost the same as IP network number. For example, if the specified
address range is 192.168.0.0/255.255.240.0, it matches: 192.168.1.0/24, 192.168.4.0/22, 192.168.8.128/25 and so on.
Redistributing routes from other protocols into OSPF requires the router to advertise each route individually in an external LSA.
Use summary address command to advertise one summary route for all redistributed routes covered by a specified network address
and mask. This helps decrease the size of the OSPF link state database.
Examples
The following example uses the summary-address command to aggregate external LSAs that match the network
172.16.0.0/24 and assign a Tag value of 3.
ospfd# configure terminal
ospfd(config)# router ospf 100
ospfd(config-router)# summary-address 172.16.0.0/16 tag 3
Related Commands
timers spf
Use the timers spf command to adjust route-calculation timers.
Use the no parameter of this command to return to the default timer values.
Command Syntax
timers spf SPF-DELAY spf-holdtime
no timers spf SPF-DELAY SPF-HOLDTIME
SPF-DELAY= <0-4294967295> Specifies the delay between receiving a change to SPF calculation.The
default spf-delay value is 5 seconds
SPF-HOLDTIME= <0-4294967295> Specifies hold time between consecutive SPF calculations. The default
spf-holdtime value is 10 seconds.
Command Mode
Router mode
Usage
The timer spf command configures the delay time between the receipt of a topology change and the calculation of the
Shortest Path First (SPF). This command also configure the hold time between two consecutive SPF calculations.
Examples
timers spf 67295 7295
Related Commands
202
SALES: 0870 90 10 750
Dual Trunk E1 Router User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
F
A
Access Router
AIS
downloading software
alarms
configuring 11-85
E
EFS events
display 11-85
attaching to a terminal
COMM 4-26
standalone 4-26
F
front panel
tests 9-65
C
carrier loss
COMM port
G
Grounding 3-19
configuring
H
Hyperterm 4-27
CSS 10-78
I
in-band
network registers
installation
D
data
diagnostics 9-65
installing
Menu-9 9-70
dial-out capability
K
L
LEDs
link-based testing
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F
STATUS 5-41
pin assignment
LMI Conditioning
pin assignments
LOFC 10-78
logging in
network 14-101
logging on
Q
QRSS 9-68
M
R
menus
requirements
RIP commands
RMON-2 10-81
S
N
Self Test
navigating
network
troubleshooting 12-90
setting
setting up
TFTP 15-103
specifications 13-95
standalone
STATUS 5-41
sync loss
O
operating
altitude 3-17
humidity 3-17
temperature 3-17
P
passwords
assigning 4-32
QRW 9-68
Performance Report
Carrier Registers
T
TCP/IP
environmental 13-96
performance 13-95
physical 13-96
reliability 13-96
telnet
terminal interface
navigating 4-26
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|